Panasonic KX-NCP 500, 1000 Pure IP-PBX PC Programming Manual
Below you will find brief information for Pure IP-PBX KX-NCP 500, Pure IP-PBX KX-NCP 1000. This is a comprehensive manual that provides step-by-step instructions and explanations for programming the PBX using the Maintenance Console software. It covers all essential features and settings, enabling you to customize and manage your PBX effectively.
Advertisement
Advertisement
Panasonic KX-NCP500
Panasonic KX-NCP1000
Panasonic Systems http://www.voicesonic.com
Phone: 877-289-2829
PC Programming Manual Pure IP-PBX
Panasonic KX-NCP500, KXNCP500, NCP500, KX-NCP1000, KXNCP1000, NCP1000
Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Pure IP-PBX.
Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: PBMPR Software File Version 1.0000 or later www.voicesonic.com
Document Version: 2008-09
Introduction
Introduction
About this Programming Manual
The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the Panasonic
Pure IP-PBX. It explains how to program this PBX using the Maintenance Console software.
The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections:
Section 1, Overview
Provides an overview of programming the PBX.
Section 2, Introduction of Maintenance Console
Explains the layout and menus of the Maintenance Console.
Sections 3 – 13, Maintenance Console Operating Instructions
Serves as reference operating instructions when using the Maintenance Console software to program the PBX.
Section 14, Appendix
Provides a list of all related PC programming items for each feature as Feature Programming References.
References Found in the PC Programming Manual
Programming Manual References
Related sections of the PC Programming Manual are listed for your reference.
Feature Manual References
The Feature Manual explains what the PBX can do, as well as how to obtain the most of its many features and facilities. Sections from the Feature Manual are listed throughout this manual for your reference.
Installation Manual References
The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and maintenance of the PBX.
Sections from the Installation Manual are listed throughout this manual for your reference.
Links to Other Pages and Manuals
If you are viewing this manual with a PC, certain items are linked to different sections of this and other PBX manuals. Click on a link to jump to that section.
Linked items include:
• Installation Manual References
• PC Programming Manual References
• Feature Manual References
Safety Notices
Please observe the safety notices in this manual in order to avoid danger to users or other people, and prevent damage to property.
The notices are classified as follows, according to the severity of injury or damage:
WARNING This notice means that misuse could result in death or serious injury.
2 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Introduction
CAUTION This notice means that misuse could result in injury or damage to property.
WARNING
Unplug the PBX from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise.
These conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorized Panasonic Factory Service Center.
CAUTION
Do not remove the SD Memory Card while power is supplied to the PBX. Doing so may cause the PBX to fail to start when you try to restart the system.
Notice
1.
During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically save the system data to the SD Memory Card. If the PBX undergoes a sudden power failure or if the system is reset for some reason, all the system data in RAM will be lost. However, if system data has been saved to the
SD Memory Card, it can be easily restored.
To save the system data to the SD Memory Card, (1) click the "SD Memory Backup" icon before resetting the PBX or turning off the power, or (2) exit the Maintenance Console so that the PBX automatically saves the system data.
2.
The PC will not perform any shutdown operation, or enter the power-saving system standby mode while the Maintenance Console is connected to the PBX.
To perform either of the operations above, first close the connection to the PBX.
Trademarks
• Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
• Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
NOTES
• The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the cover of this manual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, see How do I confirm the software version
of the PBX or installed cards? in Maintenance Console Software in 2.7.1 Frequently Asked
• Some optional service cards, PTs, and features are not available in some areas. Additionally, some optional service cards and features are not available for some PBX models. Please consult your certified
Panasonic dealer for more information.
• The PBX supports the Virtual 16-Channel SIP Trunk Card, and configuration of the card is done using the
Maintenance Console. However, all of the related programming information is explained in the
Programming Manual for Virtual SIP Trunk Card, and is therefore omitted from this manual.
• Product specifications are subject to change without notice.
In some cases, additional information, including updates to this and other manuals, is included in the
Maintenance Console’s Information before programming. Install the latest version of Maintenance
Console to view this information.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 3
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
2 Introduction of Maintenance Console ..................................................19
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
2.5.6
2.5.7
2.5.8
2.5.9
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.4
2.4.1
2.5
2.5.1
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.3
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.2
Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recording ...............................................38
Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage .............................................38
2.5.10
Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level ...........................................44
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
2.6.5
2.6.6
2.6.7
2.6.8
2.6.9
4 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Table of Contents
2.6.10
2.6.11
2.6.12
2.6.13
2.6.14
2.6.15
2.6.16
2.6.17
2.6.18
2.6.19
2.6.20
2.7
2.7.1
3.28
3.29
3.30
3.31
3.32
3.33
3.34
3.35
3.20
3.21
3.22
3.23
3.24
3.25
3.26
3.27
3.36
3.37
3.38
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.17
3.18
3.19
[1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command ....................................................107
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port—Connection Command .........110
[1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GK Settings ..................................138
[1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings .................................139
[1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP ............................................147
[1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern .................................150
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension—Connection Command ...............170
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port—Connection
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command ........................196
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View ....................................197
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command .................................215
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command ...................................252
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command .....................................274
[1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command ....................................................280
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 5
Table of Contents
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.17
4.18
4.19
4.20
4.21
[2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving ..............................298
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.17
5.18
5.19
5.20
5.21
5.22
5.23
5.24
5.25
[3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings ......................................458
[3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List .............476
[3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table ..............................479
[3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous ........................................480
[3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List ...............................................490
[3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List ........................................506
6.1
6.2
6.3
[4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate ................................574
6 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Table of Contents
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
6.16
6.17
6.18
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
[4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy ....................596
[4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate ................................638
[4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy ....................658
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 7
Table of Contents
12 [10] CO & Incoming Call ......................................................................757
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
14.1
8 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Section 1
Overview
This section provides an overview of programming the
PBX.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 9
1.1.1 Introduction
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 Introduction
These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the
PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed to customize the PBX to your requirements. These settings control the functions of the PBX, and changing them is referred to as "system programming".
Only one person can perform system programming at a time. Any other users trying to enter programming mode will be denied access.
Ways to Program
There are two programming methods:
• PC (Personal Computer) Programming
All features and settings of the PBX can be programmed through PC programming with Maintenance
Console. Installing and starting the Maintenance Console is described in Section 1.2 PC Programming.
Individual PC programming items are described in Section 2 Introduction of Maintenance Console.
• PT (Proprietary Telephone) Programming
A subset of the features and settings of the PBX can be programmed using a PT. PT programming is described in the PT Programming Manual.
10 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
1.1.2 Entering Characters
1.1.2 Entering Characters
The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password or other text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 11
1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
1.2 PC Programming
1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using the Maintenance
Console.
This section describes how to install and start the Maintenance Console.
System Requirements
Required Operating System
• Microsoft ® Windows ® XP or Windows Vista ® Business
Minimum Hardware Requirements
• HDD: 100 MB of available hard disk space
Recommended Display Settings
• Screen resolution: XGA (1024 ´ 768)
• DPI setting: Normal size (96 DPI)
Installing the Maintenance Console
Note
• Make sure to install and use the latest version of the Maintenance Console.
• To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows XP Professional, you must be logged in as a user in either the "Administrators" or "Power Users" group.
• To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows Vista Business, you must be logged in as a user in the "Administrators" group.
1.
Copy the setup file of the Maintenance Console to your PC.
2.
Double-click the setup file to run the installer.
3.
Follow the on-screen instructions provided by the installation wizard.
Starting the Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic Items (Quick
Setup)
When you start the Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code and connect to the PBX for the first time after initialization (with the factory default setting), Quick Setup will launch automatically. During
Quick Setup, you will set up the following basic items:
• Date and Time of the PBX. The date and time set to the PC’s clock will be used.
• System Password for installer for PC programming.
• Operator and manager settings. Operator extensions for all time modes (day/lunch/break/night) can be assigned.
• Flexible Numbering plan to Type 1 or Type 2. If Type 1 (with ) is selected, " " must prefix all feature numbers (except access numbers) when an extension user wants to use a feature.
• Operator call and Idle Line Access/ARS numbers.
• Remote Maintenance Dial Number. Enter the complete telephone number of the PBX. When necessary, this number will be used to access the PBX from a remote location for maintenance purposes.
• LAN settings. The DHCP Client function, IP addresses of the IPCMPR and DSP cards, subnet mask address, and default gateway address can be assigned.
1.
Connect the PC to the PBX with an Ethernet straight cable or RS-232C cross cable.
12 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
2.
Start the Maintenance Console from the Start menu.
3.
"Information before programming" appears.
4.
a.
Carefully read this important additional information, which includes updates to this and other manuals.
b.
Click OK to close this window.
a.
Enter the Installer Level Programmer Code (default: INSTALLER).
The Programmer Code authorizes different programming levels, and the Quick Setup is only available when you start the Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code.
Note
There are 2 other Programmer Codes with limited authorization: Administrator Level
(default: ADMIN), and User Level (default: USER). (See 1.2.2 Password Security)
b.
Click OK.
5.
Click Connect.
6.
a.
Select KX-NCP500/1000 from PBX Model.
b.
Select the LAN or RS-232C tab, depending on the type of PC connection with the PBX.
c.
Specify the settings as required. (See 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software
Note
When connecting to the PBX for the first time selecting LAN, the IP Address and Port
Number must be set to 192.168.0.101 and 35300 respectively.
d.
Enter the system password for installer (default: 1234).
e.
Click Connect.
7.
Follow the instructions of the Quick Setup wizard for the basic items in Quick Setup—Step 1 to 3.
8.
In Quick Setup—Step 4, the IP addressing information for the IPCMPR card can be assigned automatically through a DHCP server or entered manually.
When using a DHCP server: a.
Select Enable for the DHCP Client setting.
b.
Click Apply.
Note
The boxes will turn grey and the IP addresses will be assigned automatically after the PBX is reset.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 13
1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
When not using a DHCP server: a.
Select Disable for the DHCP Client setting.
b.
In the IP Address for IPCMPR Card box, type the IP address of the IPCMPR card.
c.
In the IP Address for VoIP-DSP box, type the IP address of the DSP card.
d.
In the Subnet Mask box, type the subnet mask address of the network.
e.
In the Default Gateway box, type the IP
address of the default gateway.
f.
Click Apply.
The system menu appears. You may now begin programming the PBX.
Notice
• Do not change the IP addresses of the IPCMPR and DSP cards once IP telephones are registered to the PBX using these IP addresses.
The IP telephones will not operate properly if these IP addresses are changed.
• A DHCP server must be able to use a "client identifier" option specified by RFC 2131.
• The PBX will not start properly if the IP addresses cannot be assigned automatically by the DHCP
*1 server when DHCP Client is set to Enable. In this case, you need to consult your network administrator because the DHCP server on your network may not be running or a network failure may have occurred.
If the DHCP server is not available, change the DHCP Client setting to Disable and set fixed IP addresses, then restart the PBX.
To change the DHCP Client setting, connect the PC with an RS-232C cross cable or Ethernet straight cable. When connecting the PC with an Ethernet straight cable, make sure the PBX is disconnected from the LAN and then connect the PC with an Ethernet straight cable using 192.168.0.101 for the IP address of the IPCMPR card.
Valid IP address range: "1.0.0.0" to "223.255.255.255"
*2 Valid IP address range: "1.0.0.0" to "223.255.255.255"
*3
*4
Valid subnet mask address range: "0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255" (except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255)
Valid IP address range: "0.0.0.0" to "223.255.255.255"
PBX Web Manager
It is possible to use a PC with the Maintenance Console (PBX Unified PC Maintenance Console) installed, as a web server. This allows users to configure the PBX via a web browser on a local client, or a remote PC through the Internet.
PBX
Client
Server IP Network
Remote PC
14 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
If Maintenance Console is installed on the client PC, a web server is not necessary.
PBX Server/Client
Accessing PBX Web Manager
PBX Web Manager can be enabled during the installation of the Maintenance Console. It can also be enabled in Options.
Note
• When starting the Maintenance Console, if there is less than 80 MB of available memory, this feature is automatically disabled.
• Only one user can access Maintenance Console or PBX Web Manager at any given time.
To start PBX Web Manager:
1.
If the PC is not the web server:
Launch a web browsing application and enter the following URL:
"http://xxx:8181/INDEX.ASPX"
’xxx’ should be replaced with the server’s IP address.
If the PC is the web server:
Double-click the PBX Web Manager icon in the system tray( ).
2.
At the login screen input the PBX’s IP address, port, and password.
Any profiles using LAN connection that have been saved when accessing the Maintenance Console directly will be automatically displayed, for easy access to your PBX.
3.
Click Connect.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 15
1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
PBX Web Manager Main Menu
After successful login the main menu will appear where settings can be changed.
Note
While logged in, if there is no activity over a 5-minute period, PBX Web Manager will automatically disconnect.
16 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
1.2.2 Password Security
1.2.2 Password Security
To maintain system security, system passwords are required to access certain programming functions of the
PBX. By giving different users access to different passwords, it is possible to control the amount of programming that each user is able to perform.
The following types of system passwords are available:
Password Description Format
System Password for User Used with the user-level programmer code to access user-level PC programming. The installer can specify which system programming settings are available.
System Password for
Administrator
Used with the administrator-level programmer code to access administrator-level PC programming. The installer can specify which system programming settings are available.
4 – 10 characters
System Password for
Installer
Used with the installer-level programmer code to access installer-level PC programming. All system programming settings are available.
CAUTION
To the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password
1.
Please provide all system passwords to the customer.
2.
To avoid unauthorized access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and inform the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become known to others.
3.
The PBX has default passwords preset. For security, change these passwords the first time that you program the PBX.
4.
Change the passwords periodically.
5.
It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum protection against unauthorized access. For a list of numbers and characters that can be used in system
passwords, see 1.1.2 Entering Characters.
6.
If a system password is forgotten, it can be found by loading a backup of the system data into a PC, and checking the password using the Maintenance Console software. If you do not have a backup of the system data, you must reset the PBX to its factory defaults and reprogram it. Therefore, we strongly recommend maintaining a backup of the system data. For more information on how to back up the system data, refer to the on-line help of the Maintenance Console.
However, as system passwords can be extracted from backup copies of the system data file, do not allow unauthorized access to these files.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 17
1.2.2 Password Security
18 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Section 2
Introduction of Maintenance Console
This section serves as reference operating instructions when using the Maintenance Console software to program the PBX.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 19
2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes
2.1 Introduction
2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes
Every time Maintenance Console is started, a dialog box will appear. From here, you can enter any of the 2 available software modes.
• Batch mode
Batch mode allows you to create new system data files, and make modifications to system data files stored on your PC, without being connected to the PBX. When you connect to the PBX, the modified data will be uploaded at one time.
• Interactive mode
Interactive mode allows you to directly modify the system data and settings stored in the PBX’s memory from a PC that is connected to the PBX. This mode displays the system data that is currently being used by the PBX, rather than the system data stored on the SD memory card. Data can be modified and results displayed in real time.
To start Maintenance Console in Batch mode
1.
Enter the relevant programmer code.
2.
Click OK.
The start menu will appear.
3.
Select an option.
• Select New to create a new system data file.
• Select Open to open an existing system data file.
To start Maintenance Console in Interactive mode
1.
Enter the relevant programmer code.
2.
Click OK.
The start menu will appear.
3.
Click Connect.
Connection options will be displayed.
• Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile. This option is only available when one or more profiles have been previously stored.
a.
Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b.
If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
• To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and select the method of connecting to the
PBX.
a.
Specify the settings as required. For more details, see the tables below.
b.
Enter the system password for the PBX.
4.
Click Connect.
Maintenance Console will start, and automatically connect to the PBX. If this is the first time that
Maintenance Console has connected to the PBX, and the date and time of the PBX have not yet been set,
the Basic Items (Quick Setup).
20 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes
Connection Settings for RS-232C
Setting
Port
Baud Rate (bps)
Values Explanation
COMx Specify the number of the COM port assigned to the PC’s
RS-232C interface. Only available COM ports are displayed.
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,
57600, 115200
Specify the speed of data transmission.
Connection Settings for Modem
Setting
Dial Number
Dial Type
Comment
Port
Baud Rate (bps)
Modem Initialize
Values Explanation
1-9, 0, *, #, -, "," [comma], T, P,
W
Auto(Tone), Auto(Pulse),
Manual
Max. 40 characters
COMx
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,
38400
–
Enter the telephone number to be dialed to access the PBX.
T: Converts the Dial Type from
Pulse to Tone.
"," [comma], P, W: Inserts a pause.
Specify the outgoing dialing method.
If Manual is chosen, dialing must be done with a connected telephone.
Enter a comment to identify the set of values.
Specify the number of the COM port assigned to the PC’s modem interface.
Only available COM ports will be displayed.
Specify the speed of data transmission.
Enter the modem initialize command, and click Initialize to send the command to the modem.
For more details, refer to your modem’s instruction manual.
Connection Settings for LAN
Setting
IP Address
Values
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Explanation
Specify the IP address of the PBX on the LAN. Enter the same IP address that was input in
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 21
2.1.2 Access Levels
Setting
Port Number
Values
1–65535
Explanation
Specify the port number used to access the PBX via LAN. Enter the same port number that was input in
2.1.2 Access Levels
There are three main levels of access to the Maintenance Console: User, Administrator and Installer. Each level has its own Programmer Code, which must be entered to run the Maintenance Console. The allowed format for each programmer code is as follows:
Item
User Level Programmer Code
Administrator Level Programmer Code
Installer Level Programmer Code
Length
0 – 16 characters
4 – 16 characters
4 – 16 characters
Access to menu options within the Maintenance Console is restricted depending on the Programmer Code,
and the current software mode (see 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes). When a
menu option is limited to certain access levels, this is noted in this manual in the initial description of that menu option, for example:
"This option is only available at Installer level."
If a sentence like this does not appear under the heading, the menu option is available at all levels.
The target users for each access level are as follows:
Access Level
User
Administrator
Installer
User
For end users
For system administrators
For dealers and system installers
The options available in each mode and access level are shown below.
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
U: User; A: Administrator; I: Installer
A check mark indicates that the menu option is available for that access level.
Start Menu
Menu Option Batch Interactive
New
Open
U A I U A I
ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
22 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.1.2 Access Levels
Menu Option
Connect—RS-232C
Connect—USB
Connect—LAN
Connect—Modem
Connect—Profile Setup
File
Menu Option
Batch Interactive
U A I U A I
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
Close
Save
Save As
Exit
Disconnect
Batch Interactive
U A I U A I
ü ü ü
ü ü ü
ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
Menu Option
Batch Interactive
U A I U A I
ü ü ü Disconnect
Tool
Menu Option
SD memory backup
NDSS Link Data Clear
DXDP All OUS
Simplified Voice Message ®Delete All Recording
Simplified Voice Message ®Check Current Usage
Call Pickup for My Group
Extension List View
Import ®Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID
Import ®Incoming Call - DID Table
Import ®ARS - Leading Digit
Batch Interactive
U A I U A I
ü ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 23
2.1.2 Access Levels
Menu Option
Import ®ARS - Except Code
Import ®ARS - Routing Plan
Import ®Wired Extension
Import ®PS Extension
Import ®Quick Dial (Basic)
Import ®Quick Dial (Expansion)
Import ®SIP Extension
Import ®V-IPGW16 GW Settings
Import ®V-IPGW16 DN2IP
Export ®Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID
Export ®Incoming Call - DID Table
Export ®ARS - Leading Digit
Export ®ARS - Except Code
Export ®ARS - Routing Plan
Export ®Wired Extension
Export ®PS Extension
Export ®Quick Dial (Basic)
Export ®Quick Dial (Expansion)
Export ®SIP Extension
Export ®V-IPGW16 GW Settings
Export ®V-IPGW16 DN2IP
Screen Customize ®User Level
Screen Customize ®Administrator Level
Utility
Menu Option
Diagnosis
File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC
SD Card File View and Load
SD Card File Delete
24 PC Programming Manual
Batch Interactive
U A I U A I
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Batch Interactive
U A I U A I
ü ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Document Version 2008-09
Menu Option
Message File Transfer PC to PBX
Message File Transfer PBX to PC
Error Log
T1 Signaling Bit Monitor
T1 Line Trace
ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace
V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace
Digital Trunk Error Report
IP Extension Statistical Information
CS Information
PS Information
Ping
Timed Update
System Reset ®Reset by the Command
Flash ROM ID Information
View
Menu Option
Toolbar
Statusbar
System Menu
Window
Menu Option
Cascade
Tile(Horz)
Tile(Vert)
Batch Interactive
U A I U A I
ü ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Batch Interactive
U A I U A I
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
Batch Interactive
U A I U A I
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
2.1.2 Access Levels
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 25
2.1.3 Software Interface
Help
Menu Option
Help
Additional Information
About
Batch Interactive
U A I U A I
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
2.1.3 Software Interface
This section explains the functions of the various elements of the software interface.
26 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.1.3 Software Interface
Main Window
The window of the Maintenance Console software is divided into several areas, as shown below:
1 2 3
4 5 6
1.
Menu Bar
Provides access to file management and connection options, as well as tools and utilities used in programming the PBX.
For details, see Sections 2.2 Start Menu to 2.7 Help.
2.
Tool Bar
Provides easy access to commonly used software functions.
Two tool bars are provided, as follows:
• File
Contains the icon for saving files. For details, see Section 2.3.2 File—Save.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 27
2.1.3 Software Interface
• Tools
Contains icons for backing up PBX data to the SD Memory Card, viewing extension information, and
accessing Online Help. For details, see Sections 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup and 2.5.7 Tool
These menus can be positioned freely. Click and drag the title bar of a menu to move it to another position.
It will automatically snap in to position above, below, to the left, or to the right of the main window if released there. Otherwise, it will float separately from the main window.
Whether the tool bar is displayed or not can be chosen by selecting Toolbar from the View menu.
3.
Tab Bar
The name of each screen currently open is displayed in a tab in this tab bar. When multiple screens are open at the same time, click on the tab of a screen to display the options associated with that screen.
4.
System Menu
Provides access to the settings used for programming the PBX, grouped into 11 topics.
For details, see Sections Section 3 [1] Configuration to Section 13 [11] Maintenance.
To display the individual screens within a topic, click the topic heading. It will expand to show the sub-topics.
• If a sub-topic contains more than one screen, clicking the name of the sub-topic will display the names of individual screens. Clicking an expanded sub-topic will hide the names of individual screens.
Double-click on a screen name to open that screen in 6. Main Screen below.
This menu can be positioned freely. Click and drag the title bar of the menu to move it to another position.
It will automatically snap in to either the left side or right side of the main window if released there.
Otherwise, it will float separately from the main window.
Whether the system menu is displayed or not can be chosen by selecting System Menu from the View menu.
5.
Status Bar
The status bar displays information on the current state of the Maintenance Console.
Whether the status bar is displayed or not can be chosen by selecting Statusbar from the View menu.
The information displayed is as follows, in order from left to right:
Area Values Description
Program Mode and
Connection Type
Program Mode:
Batch Mode xxx
Interactive Mode yyy
Displays the current program mode and connection
type. See 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console
"xxx" is replaced by the name of the current system data file.
"yyy" is replaced by the name of the profile if used.
PBX Type
Access Level
PBX System Data
Version
Connection Type:
RS232-C
USB
LAN
Modem
Type:
NCP500/NCP1000
Level :
User
Administrator
Installer
Versionxxx-xxx
Displays the type of PBX being programmed.
Displays the current access level, determined by the Programmer Code entered when starting
Maintenance Console. See 2.1.2 Access Levels
for more information.
Displays the version number of the system software installed to the PBX.
The first 3 digits are the version number, and the last 3 digits are the revision number.
28 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.1.4 Card Status
Area
PBX Region Code
Values
Regionxxx-xxx
Description
Displays the region code assigned to the PBX and
Maintenance Console.
The first 3 digits represent the region code assigned to the PBX, and the last 3 digits represent the region code assigned to the Maintenance
Console.
6.
Main Screen
Displays the screens selected from 4. System Menu above.
For details, see Sections Section 3 [1] Configuration to Section 13 [11] Maintenance.
Standard Buttons and Elements
There are several standard buttons that are displayed on many screens within the Maintenance Console.
The standard buttons are as follows:
Button Function
OK
Cancel
Close
Apply
Refresh
Help
Implements changes and closes the current screen.
Abandons changes and returns to the previous screen.
Keeps any changes implemented, and closes the current screen.
Implements changes and remains on the same screen.
Implements changes, updates displayed data, and remains on the current screen.
Displays the relevant help topic for the current screen.
In addition, many screens within the software display a small open folder icon ( ) beside lists of setting items. Clicking this icon will collapse part of the list, allowing other items to be displayed. The icon will change to a closed folder ( ).
Clicking the closed folder icon will expand the list again.
2.1.4 Card Status
Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or in-service (INS) status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the description of each item. Card
status changes can only be performed when the software is in Interactive mode (see 2.1.1 Starting
Maintenance Console and Software Modes).
• "In service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, and is capable of being used normally.
• "Out of service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, but has been temporarily removed from use. This allows settings to be modified or software to be upgraded.
• "Fault" means that the card is not installed in the PBX correctly, or is not functioning correctly. For more information, see the Installation Manual.
For details about how to change the status of a card, see To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card
(Interactive mode only) on screen 3.1 [1-1] Slot.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 29
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting
2.1.5 Display Options
The View and Window menus provide options to control the display of items within the Maintenance Console.
• View
– Toolbar: Displays or hides the tool bar of commonly used buttons.
– Statusbar: Displays or hides the bar at the bottom of the Maintenance Console window.
– System Menu: Displays or hides the menu of PBX setting screens.
• Window
– Cascade: When multiple data screens are open, displays all open screens overlapped, with the title bars visible.
– Tile(Horz): When multiple data screens are open, displays all open screens side by side.
– Tile(Vert): When multiple data screens are open, displays all open screens vertically.
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting
Many screens within the Maintenance Console software allow you to select extensions as part of programming various features (for example, as members of a group). These screens use a standard window to make selecting multiple extensions easy, accessed by clicking a button. This section explains how to use this
Extension Number Setting window.
To select multiple extension numbers, select the type of extension to display, highlight the extensions you wish to add, then click the Add button. When finished, click OK. Data for the selected extensions will be added to the first free spaces on the original screen.
Extension Type
Selects the types of extension numbers to display in
Extension Numbers & Names List. Multiple items
can be selected. Items that are not available are shown with a grey checkbox.
Default
None selected.
Value Range
Wired Extension, Portable Station, VM Group(DPT), VM Group(DTMF), ICD Group, PS Ring Group,
OGM(DISA), External Pager, Analog MODEM
Extension Numbers & Names List
select them, and click the Add button when finished, to add the selected extensions. To deselect an entry, click it again.
Default
Available extensions.
Value Range
Matching extensions
30 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting
Available Column
Specifies which fields in the original form to add extension data to. For example, if both extension numbers and names can be entered in the original form, it is possible to specify that extension name data not be transferred, by deselecting that field here.
To select or deselect a field, click its name.
Default
First available field
Value Range
Available fields
Selected Extension List
Displays the extensions that have been selected to be added to member data. To remove an extension from this list, click it to select it and click Delete.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Selected extensions
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 31
2.2.3 Start Menu—Connect—RS-232C
2.2 Start Menu
2.2.1 Start Menu—New
Creates a new system data file, used to program the PBX in Batch mode. All settings are in their initial or default state.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Note
Since selecting this option creates a blank system data file, uploading this file to the PBX will overwrite all previous settings. Use only when necessary.
To create a new system data file
1.
From the start menu, select New.
2.
Click the appropriate model number.
3.
Click OK.
2.2.2 Start Menu—Open
Opens a system data file previously saved on the PC, and enters Batch mode.
When opening a file created with an older version of the Maintenance Console, you will be asked whether you want to convert the data for use with the current version or not. Using the data without converting may result in some data being loaded to an incorrect destination, and is not recommended.
If the file is not supported by the PBX (e.g. a system data file from an incompatible PBX), it will not be opened.
The only files that can be opened are files that were created by the Maintenance Console for a supported PBX.
To open a system data file
1.
From the start menu, select Open.
The Open dialog box will be displayed.
2.
Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open.
3.
Select the file.
4.
Click Open.
If the file was created with an older version of the Maintenance Console, you will be asked if you want to convert the data.
• Click Yes to convert the data for use with the current version of the Maintenance Console. Enter a name for the new converted system file.
• Click No to open the file as it is.
2.2.3 Start Menu—Connect—RS-232C
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the serial RS-232C interface of the PBX.
This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary. If you connect to multiple PBXs and
32 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.2.5 Start Menu—Connect—LAN
would prefer to choose from among pre-saved profiles instead, see 2.2.7 Start Menu—Connect—Profile
Setup for more details about creating profiles.
To connect to the PBX by RS-232C
1.
From the start menu, select Connect.
The Login window will be displayed.
2.
Select a connection option.
• Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile. This option is only available when one or more profiles have been previously stored.
a.
Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b.
If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
• To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and confirm that the RS-232C radio button is selected.
a.
Specify the settings as required. For more details, see the table below.
b.
Enter the system password for the PBX.
3.
Click Connect.
Connection Settings for RS-232C
Setting Values Explanation
Port COMx
Baud Rate (bps) 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400, 57600,
115200
Specify the number of the COM port assigned to the PC’s RS-232C interface. Only available
COM ports are displayed.
Specify the speed of data transmission.
2.2.4 Start Menu—Connect—USB
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through a USB port (USB Module) attached to the KX-DT300 series or KX-T7600 series DPT.
To connect to the PBX by USB
1.
From the start menu, select Connect.
The Login window will be displayed.
2.
Select a connection option.
• Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile.
a.
Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b.
If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
• To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and confirm that the USB radio button is selected.
a.
Enter the system password for the PBX.
3.
Click Connect.
2.2.5 Start Menu—Connect—LAN
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the Local Area Network interface of the PBX.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 33
2.2.6 Start Menu—Connect—Modem
This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary. If you connect to multiple PBXs and
would prefer to choose from among pre-saved profiles instead, see 2.2.7 Start Menu—Connect—Profile
Setup for more details about creating profiles.
To connect to the PBX by LAN
1.
From the start menu, select Connect.
The Login window will be displayed.
2.
Select a connection option.
• Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile.
a.
Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b.
If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
• To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and confirm that the LAN radio button is selected.
a.
Specify the connection parameters as required. For more details, see the table below.
b.
Enter the system password for the PBX.
3.
Click Connect.
Connection Settings for LAN
Setting
IP Address
Port Number
Values
1.0.0.0–
223.255.255.255
1–65535
Explanation
Specify the IP address of the PBX on the LAN.
Enter the same IP address that was input in
IP Address for IPCMPR Card of 3.4 [1-1]
Specify the port number used to access the
PBX via LAN. Enter the same port number that
was input in Maintenance Port Number of
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR.
2.2.6 Start Menu—Connect—Modem
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the modem.
To access the PBX remotely using this feature, an RMT card must be installed and the Remote—Analog
Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number assigned in 13.1 [11-1] Main.
This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary. If you connect to multiple PBXs and
would prefer to choose from among pre-saved profiles instead, see 2.2.7 Start Menu—Connect—Profile
Setup for more details about creating profiles.
To connect to the PBX by Modem
1.
From the start menu, select Connect.
The Login window will be displayed.
2.
Select a connection option.
Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile.
a.
Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b.
If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
• To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and confirm that the Modem radio button is selected.
34 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.2.7 Start Menu—Connect—Profile Setup a.
Specify the settings as required. For more details, see the table below.
b.
Enter the system password for the PBX.
3.
Click Connect.
Connection Settings for Modem
Setting Values Description
Dial Number
Dial Type
Comment
Port
Baud Rate (bps)
Modem Initialize
1-9, 0, *, #, -, "," [comma],
T, P, W
Enter the telephone number to be dialed to access the PBX.
T: Converts the Dial Type from Pulse to Tone.
"," [comma], P, W: Inserts a pause.
Auto(Tone), Auto(Pulse),
Manual
Max. 40 characters
Specify the outgoing dialing method.
If Manual is chosen, dialing must be done with a connected telephone.
Enter a comment to identify the set of values.
COMx Specify the number of the COM port assigned to the PC’s modem interface.
Only available COM ports will be displayed.
Specify the speed of data transmission.
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400
– Enter the modem initialize command, and click Initialize to send the command to the modem.
For more details, refer to your modem’s instruction manual.
2.2.7 Start Menu—Connect—Profile Setup
Profiles are useful when one PC is used to connect to multiple PBXs. Rather than manually adjusting the connection settings each time a different PBX is accessed, it is possible to store the connection settings for several PBXs. Then, when you wish to connect to a specific PBX, you can simply choose that PBX’s profile from the list.
Note
When reinstalling or upgrading the Maintenance Console, it is possible to create a backup of all profiles.
This allows you to use the original connection settings with the new Maintenance Console.
The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows:
Button Function
Profile File Opens or saves profiles as separate files.
Save current profile
Save as new profile
Overwrites the previous settings with the current settings when a profile already exists.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Saves the current settings as a new profile. A Profile Name is required.
Delete profile When an existing profile is selected, deletes that profile. A confirmation message will be displayed.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 35
2.3.4 File—Exit
2.3 File
2.3.1 File—Close
Closes the system data file that is currently being modified, and returns to the start menu.
To close a system data file
• From the File menu, select Close.
If the system data file has not been saved, a warning message will be displayed, giving you the option to save the file.
• Click Yes to save the file.
• Click No to abandon the changes.
2.3.2 File—Save
Overwrites the previously saved system data file with the system data currently being modified in Batch mode.
To save a system data file
• From the File menu, select Save.
2.3.3 File—Save As
Saves the system data file being modified in Batch mode with the name chosen by the user.
To save a system data file with a new name
1.
From the File menu, select Save As.
2.
Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
3.
Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
4.
Click Save.
If choosing to overwrite another file, a warning message will be displayed.
• Click Yes to overwrite.
• Click No to return to the previous screen.
2.3.4 File—Exit
Closes the Maintenance Console.
To exit the Maintenance Console
• From the File menu, select Exit
If the system data file being modified has not been saved, a warning message will be displayed, giving you the option to save the file.
• Click Yes to save the file.
• Click No to abandon the changes.
36 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.4.1 Disconnect—Disconnect
2.4 Disconnect
2.4.1 Disconnect—Disconnect
Closes the connection between the Maintenance Console and the PBX. When this option is chosen, system
data is automatically backed up from the PBX to the SD memory card (see 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory
To disconnect
1.
From the Disconnect menu, select Disconnect.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
2.
Click Yes.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 37
2.5.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage
2.5 Tool
2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup
Saves system data from the PBX to the SD memory card. Backup begins as soon as this option is chosen.
To back up system data
• From the Tool menu, select SD memory backup.
2.5.2 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear
Clears NDSS Link Data stored in the connected PBX. While this tool clears both monitor extension and monitored extension data, it only clears it at the connected PBX. To clear this data at other PBXs in the network, it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs.
To clear the NDSS Link Data
• From the Tool menu, select NDSS Link Data Clear.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
• Click OK to clear the data.
• Click Cancel to keep the data, and close the screen.
2.5.3 Tool—DXDP All OUS
Sets the status of all DXDP/XDP extension ports to "OUS" simultaneously.
To set all DXDP/XDP ports to OUS.
1.
From the Tool menu, select DXDP All OUS.
2.
Click OK.
2.5.4 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recording
Deletes all voice messages recorded by the SVM feature.
To delete voice messages
1.
From the Tool menu, point to Simplified Voice Message and select Delete All Recording.
2.
Select the card from which to delete messages.
3.
Click OK.
2.5.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage
Displays information on the voice messages stored by the SVM feature. For each message, the type of message and the associated extension are displayed.
To view SVM message status
• From the Tool menu, point to Simplified Voice Message and select Check Current Usage.
38 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.5.7 Tool—Extension List View
2.5.6 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group
To activate this tool
• From the Tool menu, select Call Pickup for My Group.
The Group Call Pickup feature number (default: 40) + the extension user group number of the extension is assigned to first personal speed dial.
Note
This tool can only be activated if all of the following conditions are met:
– The first Quick Dial setting is empty or is already set to " 0".
– " 0" is not used for another feature number.
– The Group Call Pickup feature number has been assigned.
– The Personal Speed Dialing feature number has been assigned.
2.5.7 Tool—Extension List View
Displays a list of all programmed extension numbers and types. It is possible to sort the information according to Extension Number, Type, Extension Name, Shelf, Slot, or Port. There is also a key-word searching feature.
The types that can be displayed are as follows:
Type
Intercom
VM
Portable Station
ICDG
WG
VM (DPT)
VM (DTMF)
Pager
MODEM
OGM (DISA)
DSS
DPT-I/F CS
SVM
SIP/IP-PT
To view extension information
• From the Tool menu, select Extension List View.
Detail
Wired Extension
Voice Mail
Wireless Extension (Portable Station)
Incoming Call Distribution Group
PS Ring Group
VM (DPT) Group
VM (DTMF) Group
External Pager
Analog Modem
DISA
DSS Console
PT-interface CS
SVM Feature
IP Telephone
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 39
2.5.8 Tool—Import
2.5.8 Tool—Import
Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported.
Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.
The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX using
cannot be opened.
For all tables except ARS - Routing Plan, it is possible to edit the CSV file directly using an appropriate editor, before importing.
The types of data that can be imported using this tool, and the matching destination fields, are as follows:
Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID
Data Type
System Speed Dialing
Number
Name
CO Line Access Number +
Telephone Number
CLI Destination
Import Destination
Location
Name
Dial
CLI Destination
Related programming: 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Incoming Call - DID Table
Data Type
Location
DID Number
DID Name
DID Destination-Day
DID Destination-Lunch
DID Destination-Break
DID Destination-Night
Tenant Number
VM Trunk Group No.
CLI Ring for DID-Day
CLI Ring for DID-Lunch
CLI Ring for DID-Break
CLI Ring for DID-Night
Import Destination
Location
Dial In Number
Dial In Name
Destination-Day
Destination-Lunch
Destination-Break
Destination-Night
Tenant Number
Group Number for VPS answer
CLI Ring - Day
CLI Ring - Lunch
CLI Ring - Break
CLI Ring - Night
Related programming: 12.3 [10-3] DID Table
40 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.5.8 Tool—Import
ARS - Leading Digit
Data Type
No.
Leading Number
Additional Number of Digits
Routing Plan Number
Import Destination
Location
Leading Digit
Additional Dial Digits
Route Plan Number
Related programming: 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number
ARS - Except Code
Data Type
No.
Leading Number Exception
Import Destination
Location
Exception Code
Related programming: 10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception
ARS - Routing Plan
Data Type
(no fields to select)
Import Destination
(no fields to select)
Related programming: 10.3 [8-3] Routing Plan Time
Wired Extension
Data Type
No.
Extension Number
Extension Name
Import Destination
Location (selected automatically)
Extension Number (selected automatically)
Extension Name (selected automatically)
Related programming: 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PS Extension
Data Type Import Destination
No.
Extension Number
Extension Name
Location (selected automatically)
Extension Number (selected automatically)
Extension Name (selected automatically)
Related programming: 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 41
2.5.8 Tool—Import
Quick Dial (Basic)
Data Type
No.
Dial
Phone Number
Import Destination
Location
Dial
Phone Number
Related programming: 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Quick Dial (Expansion)
Data Type
No.
Dial
Phone Number
Import Destination
Location
Dial
Phone Number
Related programming: 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
SIP Extension
Data Type
No.
Extension Number
Password
Import Destination
Location
Extension Number
Password
Related programming: 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
V-IPGW16 GW Settings
Data Type
No.
GW Name
GW IP Address
GW Group
Connection for IP-GW16
Protocol
Progress Tone Send Mode
IP Codec Priority 1st
IP Codec Priority 2nd
IP Codec Priority 3rd
Packet Sampling Time (G.
711A)
Import Destination
Location
GW Name
GW IP Address
GW Group No.
Connection for IP-GW16
Protocol
Progress Tone Send Mode
IP Codec Priority 1st
IP Codec Priority 2nd
IP Codec Priority 3rd
Packet Sampling Time (G.
711A)
42 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.5.8 Tool—Import
Data Type
Packet Sampling Time (G.
711Mu)
Packet Sampling Time (G.
729A)
Voice Activity Detection for G.
711
FAX Detection Ability
DTMF
Payload Type
Import Destination
Packet Sampling Time (G.
711Mu)
Packet Sampling Time (G.
729A)
Voice Activity Detection for G.
711
FAX Detection Ability
DTMF
Payload Type
Related programming: 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
V-IPGW16 DN2IP
Data Type Import Destination
No.
Leading Number
Remaining Number of Digits
Location
Leading Number
Remaining Number of Digits
GW No./GW Group Selection GW No./GW Group Selection
GW Group
GW No.
GW Group
GW No.
Related programming: 3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP
To import system data
1.
From the Tool menu, point to Import, and then click the type of data to import.
2.
Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open.
3.
Select the file.
4.
Click Open to open the file.
If applicable, a list of field names found in the imported file will be displayed.
5.
For the Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID table, select the Speed Dial table to which to import the data
(system or tenant) from the drop-down list.
6.
If required, select import fields.
When import fields can be selected, the selection screen is displayed automatically. Matching origin and destination fields are entered by default.
• To change the destination for an import field, select the preferred field from the drop-down list.
• To not import a field, select the blank option from the drop-down list.
7.
Click OK to perform the import operation.
Depending on the type of data imported, the relevant programming screen may be displayed.
• Click OK or Apply to complete the import operation.
If data in a field being imported does not match the required format for the import destination, an error message will be displayed when the import operation is attempted, and the operation will be canceled.
This can occur when, for example, the destination field can only accept numeric data, but the data being imported contains alphabet characters, as the correct fields were not linked together.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 43
2.5.10 Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level
2.5.9 Tool—Export
Allows several types of system data to be exported to files. These files can be used with the Import tool (see
2.5.8 Tool—Import) to update another PBX.
Except for ARS - Routing Plan, tables are exported as comma-separated value (CSV) files.
Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.
Note
The separator used in CSV files created using the Export tool is decided by the unit specified in List
Separator, in the Windows Regional Options Control Panel.
To export system data
1.
From the Tool menu, point to Export, and then click the type of data to export.
2.
Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
3.
Enter a file name.
4.
Click Save.
• When export fields are automatically selected, the file will be saved.
• When export fields can be selected, the selection screen will be displayed automatically.
5.
For the Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID table, select the Speed Dial table from which to export the data (system or tenant) from the drop-down list.
A list of field names that can be exported will be displayed.
6.
Click the check box beside the name of each field that you want to export.
7.
Click OK.
2.5.10 Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level
Allows you to specify which menu screens, tools and utilities can be accessed in User and Administrator levels.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Selected check boxes will be displayed on the main screen of the Maintenance Console and in the menu bar to users with the level of access being edited.
To modify displayed screens
1.
From the Tool menu, point to Screen Customize, and then click the access level to modify.
2.
Select the items that you want to have displayed.
• Clear the check box beside the names of items you do not want to have displayed.
• Select the check box beside the names of items you want to have displayed.
3.
Click OK.
44 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis
2.6 Utility
2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis
Performs diagnostic tests on cards installed in the PBX, to identify the source of problems.
If any of the tests listed here returns the result "NG" ("No Good"), contact your dealer. Test results can be saved as a TXT-format (text) file.
When testing is complete, any cards that were set to OUS status must be returned to INS status if they are to be used again.
Card Test
Tests the relevant functions of a card to ensure that it is operating correctly. The tests carried out vary according to the type of card being tested.
The tests that are performed on each card are as follows:
Test Type Available Cards
Local loop back diagnosis
Card CT Bus diagnosis
DTMF Receive test port
PT loop back diagnosis
DHLC, DLC, SLC, LCOT, T1, PRI, OPB
DHLC, DLC, SLC, LCOT, T1, PRI, OPB
DHLC, SLC
DHLC, DLC
DSP DTMF generator/receiver diagnosis
DSP DTMF receiver diagnosis
T1
T1
Framer IC alarm signal detection diagnosis
T1, PRI
Framer IC error detection diagnosis T1, PRI
Caller ID card loop back diagnosis LCOT
To perform a card test
1.
From the Utility menu, select Diagnosis.
2.
Click on the Status cell of the card to be tested, and set it to "OUS".
3.
Click on the cell showing the card type.
A new window will be displayed.
4.
Select the Card Test option.
A new window will be displayed.
5.
Click Test to perform the test(s).
The error report will be displayed. When all tests are completed, the words "Test End!" will be shown on the last line of the output.
6.
Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1.
Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2.
Click Save.
• Click Cancel to return to the Diagnosis screen.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 45
2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
Network Loopback Test
Performs a remote loopback test on the PRI23 card.
Note
• To perform this test, it is necessary to set
Loopback Test started by Network in 3.28 [1-1] Slot
—Port Property - PRI Port to "Enable".
• The version of the PRI23 card must be 2.000 or later.
To perform a network loopback test
1.
From the Utility menu, select Diagnosis.
2.
Click on the Status cell of the PRI23 card, and set it to "OUS".
3.
Click on the cell showing the card type.
A new window will be displayed.
4.
Select the Loopback Type option.
A new window will be displayed.
5.
Select Point1 or Point2 depending on the type of loopback test you want to perform.
The available selections may vary depending on the hardware version of the card.
6.
Click Apply.
Preparation for the test is complete. The test will start automatically.
7.
After the test is complete, select Release and click Apply.
8.
Click Close to return to the Diagnosis screen.
2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
Copies PBX system files (program files, data files and activation key files) from the connected PC to the SD memory card installed in the PBX. Pre-existing files on the SD memory card are overwritten.
This option is only available at Installer level.
The following types of files can be copied using this tool:
• Program files: These contain the programs used to operate cards within the PBX and CSs, acting as on-board drivers.
• Data files: These contain the initial configuration data for individual cards and settings.
• Activation Key files: These contain the activation keys used to enable the use of IP CO lines and IP telephones through Virtual VoIP cards and upgrade the software.
Not all files that are copied using this tool are automatically made active. To install new program files, main system data, or activation key for software upgrade to the PBX, use the System Reset—Reset by the
Command utility (see 2.6.19 Utility—System Reset—Reset by the Command) for PBMPR, DBSYS, and
Card File View and Load utility (see 2.6.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load) for all other files.
The PBX examines the header information of a file to determine 2 things: whether the file contains supported data, and which system component the file applies to.
Only files whose header information matches that of a system file supported by the PBX can be transferred.
Attempting to transfer any other type of file results in an error message.
The names of all files that can be stored on the SD memory card are as follows:
46 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
Main Program
Name on SD Memory Card
PBMPR
PBMPR_S
Corresponding Card
IPCMPR
*1 PBMPR-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX from the PC is saved as "PBMPR_S".
LPR Program
Name on SD Memory Card
PDHLC
PSLC
PT1
PPRI23
POPB3
Corresponding Card
DHLC4/DLC8/DLC16
SLC8/SLC16
T1
PRI23
OPB
CS Program
Name on SD Memory Card
PDCSDECT
PHCSDECT
PDCS24G
Corresponding Unit
CS using a DHLC/DLC card for DECT Portable Station
High-density CS for DECT Portable Station
CS using a DHLC/DLC card for 2.4 GHz Portable Station
System Data
Name on SD Memory Card
DBSYS
DBSYS_S
Corresponding Card
IPCMPR
IPCMPR
*1 DBSYS-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as "DBSYS_S".
Language Data
Name on SD Memory Card
DLNG0–DLNG1
DVMLNG1–DVMLNG5
Corresponding Unit
PT
VPS (Display Guidance data)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 47
2.6.3 Utility—File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC
Activation Key
Name on SD Memory Card
LIC00–LIC99
Corresponding Unit
V-IPEXT32, V-SIPEXT32, V-IPGW16, V-SIPGW16
Default Value Data
Name on SD Memory Card
DBINI
DBIDHLC
DBISLC
DBIDLC
DBILCOT
DBIT1
DBIOPB3
DBIEIO
DBIPRI23
DBISLCLC
DBIVIPGW
DBIVSPGW
DBIVIPEX
DBIVSPEX
Corresponding Card
IPCMPR
DHLC4
SLC8
DLC8/DLC16
LCOT4
T1
OPB3
EIO
PRI23
SLC16
V-IPGW16
V-SIPGW16
V-IPEXT32
V-SIPEX32
To transfer files to the SD memory card
1.
From the Utility menu, select File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).
The dialog box will be displayed.
2.
Select the file to upload.
A window showing the upload progress will be displayed.
While transferring files to the SD memory card, the PBX automatically renames them according to the header information.
A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.
3.
Click OK.
2.6.3 Utility—File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC
Copies system data files from the SD memory card installed in the PBX to the connected PC.
This option is only available at Installer level.
The files that can be downloaded from the SD memory card are as follows:
48 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.6.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load
File Name
DBSYS
$SYSERR
$SYSERR1–$SYSERR9
LIC00–LIC99
File Type
System Data
Error Data
Activation Key
Downloading the DBSYS system data file allows you to make a backup of the configuration of the PBX.
The error data files are snapshots of the configuration of the PBX taken automatically when a major error causes a system reset. They can be analyzed by your dealer to identify the source of a problem. If there is only one error data file, its name will be $SYSERR. If there is more than one file, the files will be numbered in chronological order, up to a maximum of 9 files.
To transfer files to the PC
1.
From the Utility menu, select File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC.
2.
Select the file to download from the list of files on the SD memory card.
Only the files listed in the table above can be downloaded. Selecting any other file will cause an error message to be displayed.
3.
Click Transfer.
The Save dialog box will be displayed
4.
Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
5.
Enter a file name.
6.
Click Save.
A window showing the download progress will be displayed.
A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.
7.
Click OK.
2.6.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load
Displays a list of files on the SD memory card, and allows you to update the programs stored in LPR cards
(cards with local processors) and Cell Stations (CSs).
This option is only available at Installer level.
To update the program stored in an LPR card, the card must first be set to out of service (OUS). To update the program stored in a CS, the port of the card (DHLC/DLC) that the CS is attached to must be set to OUS, but the card itself must be set to in service (INS). Only cards that are in the correct status will be displayed.
The name, date and time of creation, and size of files are displayed.
This utility can also display information on activation key files stored in the SD memory card.
The effective date, IPCMPR-ID, activated feature type, number of activated features, and expiration date of activation keys are displayed on the Detail screen. The expiration date of preinstalled activation keys is displayed as "Unlimited duration".
To view and load files on the SD memory card
1.
From the Utility menu, select SD Card File View and Load.
2.
Click on the name of the desired file.
Only files containing program data (whose filenames start with "P") can be selected.
3.
Click Detail.
The Detail screen will be displayed. Header information from the chosen SD memory card file is displayed on the left.
4.
From the Card drop-down list on the right, select the card(s) whose software you want to update.
• To update a specific card or port:
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 49
2.6.6 Utility—Message File Transfer PC to PBX
• LPR cards: select the slot number and card name.
• CSs: select the slot number and card name, and then select the related CS port from the drop-down list directly below.
• To update all matching cards simultaneously:
• Select "ALL".
5.
Click View to update the displayed header information of the selected files.
The file with the higher File Version and File Revision numbers is newer.
6.
Click Load to update the file stored on the PBX.
When the update is finished, a message will be displayed.
7.
Click OK.
The display will return to the Detail screen.
To view information on activation key files stored in the SD memory card (Interactive mode only)
1.
From the Utility menu, select SD Card File View and Load.
2.
Click on the name of the desired activation key file.
3.
Click Detail.
The Detail screen will be displayed.
2.6.5 Utility—SD Card File Delete
Allows you to delete files from the SD memory card.
This option is only available at Installer level.
The following essential system files cannot be deleted by this utility:
PBMPR, DBSYS
To delete files from the SD memory card
1.
From the Utility menu, select SD Card File Delete.
2.
Click on the file to be deleted.
3.
Click Delete.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
4.
Click OK.
The display will return to the SD Card File Delete screen.
2.6.6 Utility—Message File Transfer PC to PBX
Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the PC to the selected MSG/ESVM card.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that at least 1 MSG/ESVM card is installed. The
OPB card that it is mounted on must be set to OUS status.
Files are stored on the MSG/ESVM card in the location specified by the file’s header information. Uploaded files are automatically renamed as necessary. If this location already contains an OGM, it will be overwritten by the newly uploaded message.
To transfer OGMs to an MSG/ESVM card
1.
From the Utility menu, select Message File Transfer PC to PBX.
2.
Select the target MSG/ESVM card, or "ALL", from the drop-down list, and click OK.
The Open dialog box will be displayed.
3.
Select the message files to upload.
It is possible to select multiple files.
4.
Click OK.
The files will be uploaded. Files that do not contain message data will be ignored.
50 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.6.8 Utility—Error Log
When complete, the display will return to the main screen.
2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC
Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the MSG/ESVM card to the PC.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that at least 1 MSG/ESVM card is installed. The
OPB card that it is mounted on must be set to OUS status.
To transfer OGMs to the PC
1.
From the Utility menu, select Message File Transfer PBX to PC.
2.
From the upper drop-down list, select the target MSG/ESVM card.
3.
From the lower drop-down list, select the messages to transfer.
• To transfer a certain message, select the number of that message.
• To transfer all messages at once, select "ALL".
The Save dialog box will be displayed.
4.
Enter a file name.
5.
Click Save.
6.
Click OK.
When you choose to transfer all messages, each message is saved as an individual file, with a number appended to the file name corresponding to that message’s location on the MSG/ESVM card.
When complete, the display will return to the main screen.
2.6.8 Utility—Error Log
Collects and displays system error information.
Whenever there is a system failure, the PBX stores the error code generated. The connected PC collects all of these codes, along with other information, and displays an explanatory error message.
The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows:
Button Function
Cancel
Capture
Minor
Major
Clear
Log Information
Closes the Error Log screen without saving.
Saves the currently displayed Error Log information as a text file.
Displays minor errors, which affect only a certain part of system operation.
Displays major errors, which affect operation of the whole system, or result in system failure.
Erases the stored error log information from both the screen and the
PBX.
Displays probable causes of the errors and their solutions.
The items displayed on screen are as follows:
Item Description
Index
Date
The ordinal number assigned to an error record in the current log.
The date of the error detection.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 51
2.6.9 Utility—T1 Signaling Bit Monitor
Item
Time
Error Code
Sub Code
Description
The time of the error detection.
The 3-digit error code assigned by the PBX.
The 6-digit sub code of the relevant hardware. (X1YYZZ)
• X: Slot type
– Physical slot: " " (blank)
– Virtual slot: "*" (asterisk)
• 1: Cabinet number
• YY: Slot number
– KX-NCP500 (Physical slot): 00 to 05
(00: IPCMPR Card Slot; 01 to 05: Free Slots)
– KX-NCP1000 (Physical slot): 00 to 07
(00: IPCMPR Card Slot; 01 to 07: Free Slots)
– KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 (Virtual slot): 01 to 08
(01 to 04: Virtual CO Line Slots; 05 to 08: Virtual Extension
Slots)
• ZZ: Port number
– For optional service cards except OPB3 card:
Port number (01 to 16) will be displayed.
– For OPB3 card:
Sub slot number (1 to 3) + port number (1 to 4) will be displayed as follows:
• Sub slot 1 of OPB3: 11 to 14
• Sub slot 2 of OPB3: 21 to 24
• Sub slot 3 of OPB3: 31 to 34
Note
When there is no parameter for slot and port number, YY and ZZ will be displayed as "00".
Example: Sub code for IPCMPR card = " 10000"
A description of the error.
Error Message
To view the error log
• From the Utility menu, select Error Log.
2.6.9 Utility—T1 Signaling Bit Monitor
Displays reference signaling bit information for all channels of the T1 card, by monitoring sent and received A,
B, C and D bits. This utility is intended for use by dealers.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target T1 card be set to INS status.
While monitoring is being performed, any displayed bits whose value changes from 0 to 1 or vice versa will be highlighted in red until the next screen refresh is performed.
To view signaling bit information
1.
From the Utility menu, select T1 Signaling Bit Monitor.
2.
From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
3.
From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen refresh.
52 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.6.12 Utility—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace
4.
Click Start.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified.
5.
Click Stop to end monitoring.
To refresh the screen at any time while monitoring is stopped, click Refresh.
2.6.10 Utility—T1 Line Trace
Traces the sent and received signaling bits and dial numbers on the specified channel of the T1 line. This utility is intended for use by dealers.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target T1 card be set to INS status.
To view T1 trace data
1.
From the Utility menu, select T1 Line Trace.
2.
From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
3.
From the CH No drop-down list, select the target channel.
4.
Click Start.
Trace information will be displayed. The information is automatically updated whenever the data being monitored changes.
5.
Click Stop to end the trace.
6.
Select an option:
• Click Capture to save the displayed trace information.
Information is saved as a text-format file.
• Click Clear to erase the information.
2.6.11 Utility—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace
This utility collects protocol trace data from PRI cards, and displays it on the PC.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target PRI card be set to INS status.
Protocol trace data is continually accumulated on ISDN cards, and 3 types of data can be downloaded:
• Real Time Trace: Pseudo-real-time data is collected through data polling at one-second intervals. The displayed information is updated beginning when the Start button is clicked.
• Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated data is retrieved and displayed.
• Error Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated error data is retrieved and displayed. This trace shows the data snapshot that is taken just before a card resets.
To view trace data
1.
From the Utility menu, select ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace.
2.
From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
3.
From the Trace Data Type drop-down list, select the type of data to view.
4.
Click Start.
Trace information will be displayed.
5.
Select an option:
• Click Capture to save the displayed trace information.
• Click Clear to clear the screen display.
6.
Click Cancel to return to the main screen.
2.6.12 Utility—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace
This utility collects trace data of protocol activity from V-IPGW16 card.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target V-IPGW16 card be set to INS status.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 53
2.6.13 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report
To save trace data to the SD Memory Card
1.
From the Utility menu, select V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace.
When the progress bar disappears, the protocol trace is complete. The trace data has been saved to the
SD Memory Card (file name: "PRTH323").
To transfer trace data to the PC
1.
From the Utility menu, select File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC.
The list of trace data files will be displayed.
2.
Select the desired trace data file.
3.
Click Transfer.
4.
Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
5.
Enter a file name.
6.
Click Save.
7.
Click OK.
2.6.13 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report
Displays accumulated information on various types of errors occurring on digital CO lines.
This option is only available at Installer level.
The value displayed for each error item is the number of times that each error occurred during the time period selected. Average values for these items vary depending upon many factors, such as the equipment being used, and the distance from the telephone company.
The displayed items are as follows:
Item
Time
Slot
Counter of Digital Trunk
Error Logs logged in "Minor Error" Log
Out of SYNC (#300)
RAI (#301)
AIS (#302)
Counter of minor communication error
FE
LV
SL
Frame Failure (#300)
CRC
SF
Description
Time of error
Relevant slot and card type
Digital CO line out of sync (Loss of Signal)
Digital CO line RAI signal reception
Digital CO line Alarm Indication Signal reception
Digital CO line frame failure (Loss of Frame)
Cyclic Redundancy Check error
Severely errored frame (or Severe Framing
Error)
Frame synchronization bit-error
Line Code Violation
Controlled slip
To view digital CO line information
1.
From the Utility menu, select Digital Trunk Error Report.
2.
From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
• To generate a report on a specific card, select the slot number and card name.
• To generate a report on all matching cards simultaneously, select "ALL".
54 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.6.15 Utility—CS Information
3.
From the Display form drop-down list, select the time period to view.
4.
Click Execute.
The error report will be displayed.
2.6.14 Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information
Displays accumulated statistical information on IP extensions, V-IPEXT32 cards, and the DSP card.
The displayed items are as follows:
Item
Collection Started Time
Port No.
RTP Receive Packet Counter
RTP Receive Lost Packet Counter
RTP Receive Abandoned Packet Counter
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MAX.) [ms]
Description
Date and time the port was last reset.
Number of the port.
Total number of packets received.
Total number of packets lost.
Total number of packets abandoned.
Maximum time taken for a packet to arrive.
Minimum time taken for a packet to arrive.
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MIN.) [ms]
To view IP extension information
1.
From the Utility menu, select IP Extension Statistical Information.
2.
From the Card Selection drop-down list, select the slot number for V-IPEXT32 cards. "IPCMPR
(VoIP-DSP)" can be selected for the DSP card when DSP Card Status is enabled. See 3.4 [1-1] Slot—
3.
Click Execute.
The statistical information will be displayed.
4.
Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1.
Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2.
Click Save.
• Click Clear to erase the information and reset the Collection Started Time.
5.
Click Cancel to return to the main screen.
2.6.15 Utility—CS Information
Displays information stored by the PBX regarding each Cell Station (CS).
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target DHLC or DLC card be set to INS status.
The displayed items are as follows:
Item
Slot
Description
Number of the slot
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 55
2.6.16 Utility—PS Information
Item
Port
CS Name
Status
Version
Revision
CSID
Path
Group Call
Description
Number of the port
Name of the attached CS
Service status of the attached CS: INS, OUS, or FAULT.
If the status is FAULT, subsequent data items for that port will be left blank.
Version number of the program file stored in the CS
Revision number of the program file stored in the CS
12-digit ID number of the CS
Number of the wireless extension currently using each path. In the case of a group, several extensions may be using the same floating extension number.
When an extension number is not registered, the display shows "OFF".
Both 2.4 GHz PSs and DECT PSs can use up to 2 paths. When using high-density CSs, DECT PSs can use up to 8 paths.
Number of PSs registered to the attached CS that are members of a PS
Ring Group.
To view CS information
1.
From the Utility menu, select CS Information.
2.
From the Target CSI/F Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
• To display information on a single card, select the slot number and name of that card.
• To display information on all matching cards, select "All".
3.
From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen refresh.
4.
Click Start to begin monitoring.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified.
To refresh the screen manually at any time, click Refresh.
5.
Click Stop to end monitoring.
6.
Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1.
Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2.
Click Save.
• Click Cancel to return to the main screen.
2.6.16 Utility—PS Information
Displays Portable Station (PS) registration information, including the associated Cell Station (CS).
This option is only available at Installer level.
The displayed items are as follows:
Item
PS No.
Description
PS location number.
Only registered PSs will be displayed.
56 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.6.18 Utility—Timed Update
Item
Extension Number
Location—Slot
Location—Port
Description
Extension number of the PS.
Slot number of the CS that the PS is registered with.
Port number of the CS that the PS is registered with.
To view PS information
1.
From the Utility menu, select PS Information.
2.
Click Refresh.
2.6.17 Utility—Ping
Performs a connection test on network devices. This function sends echo requests to a particular IP address across an IP network, and displays the result of responses and round-trip time.
This option is only available when the Maintenance Console is in Interactive mode.
To perform a Ping test
1.
Enter a specific IP address in the IP Address box.
2.
Click Test to perform the test.
The result will be displayed.
3.
Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1.
Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2.
Click Save.
• Click Close to return to the Ping screen.
2.6.18 Utility—Timed Update
Updates programs in the LPR cards (optional service cards with local processors) by comparing them with files found on the SD memory card on a preset schedule, and downloading newer files to the cards.
This option is only available at Installer level.
It is recommended to set the timed update to take place during the least active time period, for example late at night.
Cards are automatically set to OUS status during an update, and returned to INS status when the update is complete.
This utility does not apply to CS programs. These must be updated manually using the SD Card File View
and Load utility (see 2.6.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load).
When this utility has been set, all commands that would affect the status of cards are prevented from operating.
The list of these commands is as follows:
• Card status change (INS/OUS)
• Diagnosis commands
• Card installation
• Card deletion
• Remote reset
• LPR program download requests
• Signaling Bit Monitor requests (T1)
• Line trace start requests (T1)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 57
2.6.19 Utility—System Reset—Reset by the Command
• ISDN/QSIG Protocol Data Trace start requests
• Time setting
• CS program download requests
• File deletion
When a function other than those listed above, that cannot be performed while Timed Update has been set, is selected, an error message will be displayed.
To turn this utility on:
1.
From the Utility menu, select Timed Update.
2.
Select the Set option.
The time setting box will become available.
3.
Enter the desired time using the number keys.
Click in the hour or minute field and use the up and down arrows to adjust the displayed time in increments of one unit.
4.
Click Apply.
A message box will be displayed.
5.
Click Yes.
To turn this utility off:
1.
From the Utility menu, select Timed Update.
2.
Select the Off (Cancel) option.
3.
Click Apply.
A message box will be displayed.
4.
Click Yes.
2.6.19 Utility—System Reset—Reset by the Command
Updates the main system program and data files stored within the PBX using files taken from the SD memory card, and resets the connected PBX.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Two copies of each of the main system files can be stored on the SD memory card. The names of these files are as follows:
File Name Description
DBSYS
DBSYS_S
PBMPR
PBMPR_S
Main system data file. Contains all of the current configuration data for the PBX.
Backup main system data file
PBX program file. Contains the software to run the IPCMPR board of the
PBX.
Backup PBX program file
When new DBSYS and PBMPR files are transferred from a connected PC to the SD memory card using the
stored as the backup files. To use these files on the PBX, it is necessary to first swap them with the currently active files on the SD memory card.
To update system files and reset the PBX
1.
From the Utility menu, point to System Reset and then click Reset by the Command.
58 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.6.20 Utility—Flash ROM ID Information
2.
Choose whether to back up current system data or not.
• Click SD Backup to back up the current system data to the SD memory card before proceeding.
Select this if you intend to use the current system data unchanged after reset.
• Click Skip to continue without backing up.
Select this if you intend to replace the current system data with data that was uploaded from the PC.
The second screen will be displayed. A list of matching files found on the SD memory card, with dates and times, is shown at the top.
3.
Select whether to replace the DBSYS and PBMPR files or not.
When no backup file is found, the corresponding options are not available.
4.
Click OK.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
5.
Select an option:
• Click OK to reset the PBX.
If OK is clicked, a final confirmation screen will be displayed.
• Click Cancel to return to the main screen without copying files.
6.
Click OK to reset the PBX, or Cancel to return to the main screen without copying files.
If the reset command was not carried out correctly, an error message will be displayed, and you will be returned to the main screen.
After resetting the PBX with this command, it is necessary to reconnect to the PBX to continue programming.
2.6.20 Utility—Flash ROM ID Information
Displays the Flash ROM ID number pre-assigned to the PBX, used for PBX installation management.
To view the Flash ROM ID
• From the Utility menu, click Flash ROM ID Information.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 59
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
2.7 Help
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
This section provides answers to some common questions about using the Maintenance Console software to program the PBX. The information is divided into the following topics:
Title Description
Connecting to the PBX using Maintenance Console.
Using the Maintenance Console software.
Changing the status (INS/OUS) of cards.
Setting up portable stations, including registration and deregistration.
Changing the numbering plan for the PBX, or numbers of individual extensions or features.
Safely saving PBX data edited with Maintenance Console.
Setting up individual features.
Connection
Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via RS-232C cable.
A • Is the cable firmly connected to both the PC and the PBX?
• Is the serial port that the PC uses correctly specified?
• Is the baud rate correct?
The default setting, and a safe rate, is 19 200 bps.
• Is the password correct?
• Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?
Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via USB.
A • Is the USB cable firmly connected to both the PC and the KX-DT300 series/
KX-T7600 series DPT with a USB Module?
• Is the USB driver on the PC running?
To confirm, open the Windows Device Manager, and look for "Panasonic KX-TDA USB
Main Unit driver" in the USB Controllers section. If it is not present, re-install the USB driver
• Is the password correct?
• Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?
Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via LAN.
A • Is the PC connected to the LAN?
• Have the IP address and port number of the PBX been set correctly? For more details,
see 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR.
• Is the password correct?
• Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?
60 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via modem.
A •
Is the dial number of the modem correct? For more details, see 13.1 [11-1] Main.
• Has a modem been installed to the PBX?
• Are the modem settings of the PBX and Maintenance Console correct? For more
details, see 13.1 [11-1] Main.
• Is the password correct?
• Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?
Q Can I perform initial setup of the PBX without being connected to the PBX?
A • Yes. This is possible in Batch mode.
Create a new system data file using 2.2.1 Start Menu—New, edit settings as required,
and then upload this file to the PBX later (see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX
Maintenance Console Software
Q How do I confirm the software version of the PBX or installed cards?
A •
From 3.1 [1-1] Slot, click Summary. Summary information, including software
versions, is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX.
Q Not all of the characters of a setting can be displayed because the column is too narrow.
A • Move the mouse to the line between the names of 2 setting items, at the top of the table.
The pointer will change to a double arrow. Click and drag the line to the right until all characters are displayed.
Card Status
Q The status of a new card will not change to "INS".
A • With the new card installed, does the total number of extensions or CO lines exceed the maximum supported by the PBX?
• Is the type of card installed in the slot different from the card type set as "Pre-Install" for that slot? Confirm that the correct card is installed in the slot.
• Is the card firmly and fully installed in the slot? Confirm that the card is installed correctly in the slot.
• Confirm that the card is not damaged.
Q I cannot change an LCO port to INS status.
A • Is the card installed in the appropriate slot?
• Is the card installed in the correct slot, but not functioning correctly?
Check the condition of the card.
• Is the card itself in INS status?
Set it to INS status.
• Is a CO line connected to the appropriate port?
• Is the port in FAULT status, even though a CO line is connected?
Run diagnosis on the relevant slot.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 61
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Q How do I prevent newly installed cards automatically being changed to "INS"?
A • Change
New Card Installation—Card Status for any Card in 3.37 [1-3] Option
from "In Service (INS)" to "Out of Service (OUS)".
Portable Stations
Q I cannot register Portable Stations using the method described in Portable Station
[1-2].
A • Is the status of the DHLC or DLC card set to "INS"?
• Is a CS connected to the DHLC or DLC card? If not, connect one.
• Do the PINs (Personal Identification Numbers) of the PBX and the Portable Station match? Confirm that they are the same.
• Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS?
• Has the Portable Station previously been registered at another location?
It is not possible to register a Portable Station at 2 locations, so use the Forced
De-registration option to delete the previous registration.
Q I cannot delete the extension number of a Portable Station.
A • First, de-register the Portable Station itself, and then delete the extension number.
Q I cannot de-register a Portable Station.
A • Is the Portable Station turned on? If not, turn it on.
• Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS? If not, move it closer to the
CS and try the de-registration operation again.
Q The Portable Station I want to de-register is broken, and will not turn on, or is not available, or the registration information was deleted first from the Portable Station, so it cannot be de-registered.
A • The Portable Station can be forcibly de-registered by the following the procedure shown in
Forced De-registration of 3.36 [1-2] Portable Station.
Q I changed the extension number of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable
Station still shows the old extension number.
A • Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location.
Q I changed the FCO of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable Station still shows the old FCO.
A • Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location.
Q If I delete the extension number of a Portable Station, and then turn the Portable
Station off and back on again, it does not function correctly.
A • Do not delete the extension number of the Portable Station, as this information is necessary for it to operate.
62 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Numbering
Q How do I change the extension number of a wired extension?
A • Change the extension number of the target port to the new number, and click Apply.
Next, set the port to OUS status, and then back to INS status.
Q I changed the extension number of a wired extension while the extension was engaged in a call, but the display still shows the previous extension number.
A • The extension number will not change while the extension is in use. When the conversation is finished, set the port to OUS status, and then back to INS status.
Q How do I change the extension numbering plan from 3-digit numbers to 4-digit numbers?
A • Perform the following steps:
1.
Open the 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main screen.
2.
Enter a 2-digit number in Leading Number, or change No. of Additional
For more details, see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan? in
Q How do I set a 3-digit numbering plan?
A •
There are 2 methods of creating a 3-digit numbering plan, using 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering
1.
Set the leading number to be 2 digits, with one additional digit. This method allows a maximum of 10 extensions.
Example:
Leading Number = 10; No. of Additional Digits = x
In this example, extension numbers 100 to 109 can be used.
2.
Set the leading number to be one digit, with 2 additional digits. This method allows a maximum of 100 extensions.
Example:
Leading Number = 1; No. of Additional Digits = xx
In this example, extension numbers 100 to 199 can be used.
For more details, see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan? in
Q What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan?
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 63
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
A • Perform the following steps:
1.
Confirm that the Numbering Plan you will change is not currently being used by any
extensions (see 2.5.7 Tool—Extension List View).
If it is being used by extensions, temporarily change the extension numbers of those extensions to that of another numbering plan, or delete the extension number (see
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings and 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable
2.
Clear the
3.
Click Apply.
4.
Modify the
No. of Additional Digits cell as required.
5.
Click Apply.
6.
Enter the desired value in the
7.
Click Apply.
8.
Set all extension ports to OUS status.
9.
On the relevant screens, set the extension numbers of extensions to the desired values.
10.
Set all extension ports back to INS status.
Q When modifying the Numbering Plan, I cannot change the Leading Number.
A • It is not possible to use the same Leading Number for 2 extension blocks, or to use a number that could possibly overlap with another Leading Number.
So, for example, if "2" is already set as a Leading Number it is not possible to set "21" as another Leading Number because of the possible overlap of extension numbers.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
• A feature number
• Another extension block
• A
Dial setting (see 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table)
•
Quick Dialing (see 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.
Q When modifying the Numbering Plan, how do I set a 1-digit extension number?
A • Perform the following steps:
1.
Clear the
2.
Click Apply.
3.
Set No. of Additional Digits to "None".
4.
Click Apply.
5.
Enter the desired value in the
6.
Click Apply.
7.
Set all extension ports to OUS status.
8.
On the relevant screens, set the extension numbers of extensions to the desired values.
9.
Set all extension ports back to INS status.
Q How do I change a feature number?
A • Perform the following steps:
1.
Open the 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main screen.
2.
Change the value in the Dial cell of the desired feature.
3.
Click Apply.
64 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Q I cannot change a feature number.
A • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
• A feature number
• An extension
•
Dial setting (see 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table)
•
Quick Dialing (see 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.
Q How do I change the code used to access another PBX?
A • Perform the following steps:
1.
Open the 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main screen.
2.
Select the Other PBX Extension tab.
3.
Change the value in the
Dial cell of the desired feature.
4.
Click Apply.
Q I cannot change an Other PBX Extension code.
A • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
• A feature number
• An extension
•
Dial setting (see 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table)
•
Quick Dialing (see 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.
Q I cannot change a feature number on the B/NA DND Call Feature screen.
A • The number you are trying to store is already being used by another call feature.
Please choose a different number.
Q How do I prevent extension numbers being automatically assigned to a newly installed card?
A •
Change New Card Installation—Automatic Extension Number Set for
Extension Card in the 3.37 [1-3] Option screen from "Automatic" to "Manual".
Saving Modified Data
Q Modified settings have not been updated in the PBX.
A • Click Apply or OK in the sub-menu screen.
Q Modified settings are not saved even when I press the Apply button.
A • To save the system data files, choose Save from the File menu.
Q If I reset the PBX directly after modifying settings, the modified settings are not updated in the PBX.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 65
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
A • When you click Apply, the settings are updated in the PBX, but are not yet saved to the SD memory card. If system data is not saved to the SD memory card, the PBX will restore the data that was last saved to the card in the event that the PBX is reset, or power is turned off and back on again.
Therefore, before resetting the PBX, click the SD memory backup icon to save the system data to the SD memory card. Alternatively, exit the Maintenance Console. This automatically saves system data to the SD memory card.
Note
Do not remove the SD memory card while power is supplied to the PBX. Doing so may cause the PBX to fail to start when you try to restart the system.
Q After reinitializing the PBX, I restored system data from a previous backup.
However, some of the settings have not been restored to their previous values.
A • The following setting data is not saved to the SD memory card, so will be deleted when the PBX is initialized. This data is stored in the PBX’s battery backup memory.
• Incoming Call Log
• Outgoing Call Log (including Last Number Redial)
• Message Waiting
• SMDR
• ICD Group monitor log for supervisor
• PBX date and time
• Timed Reminder
• LPR Timed Update time
• PT handset/headset volume
• PT SP-PHONE volume
• PT ring volume
• PT display contrast
• ICD Group login status
(All extensions are set to Login by default.)
• ICD Group Ready/Not Ready status
(All extensions are set to Ready by default.)
• Live Call Screening (LCS) On/Off
• Hands-free Answerback status
• Absent Message status of extensions
(Absent Message data itself is not cleared.)
• FWD/DND status
(FWD destinations are not cleared.)
• Extension Dial Lock/Remote Extension Dial Lock
• Extension PIN Lock/Extension PIN Lock counter
• Verification Code PIN Lock/Verification Code PIN Lock counter
• Password Lock counter for Remote System Programming
• PBX Error Log
• Digital CO Line Error Report data
In addition, the following data cannot be restored:
• SVM Log and messages (both greeting messages and voice messages left by callers) recorded by SVM feature.
66 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Setting Features
Q How do I change the dialing mode of an analog CO line?
A •
From the 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port screen, change the
Mode setting of the target port to "DTMF" or "Pulse", as required.
Q How do I set disconnect detection (CPC Detection) for an analog CO line?
A •
From the 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port screen, modify the CPC
Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming setting of the target port.
The required value varies by carrier. Transmission and reception can be set separately.
Q How do I connect to another PBX using QSIG?
A •
From the 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port screen, set the
the port you want to use to either "QSIG-Slave" or "QSIG-Master".
Q How do I change the type of an extension port?
A • Set the port to OUS status. Then, change
—Port Property - Extension Port window
DPT Type—Type in the 3.21 [1-1] Slot
Q I have set the type of an extension port to "DSS Console", but I cannot apply this setting. (Error E000402)
A •
DPT Type—Location No. on the 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port
Property - Extension Port screen is the same as that entered for another DSS
Console. Change this so that the numbers do not overlap.
Q I have set the type of an extension port to "VM (DPT)", but I cannot apply this setting.
(Error E000403)
A •
DPT Type—VM Unit No. and DPT Type—VM Port No. settings entered on
the 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port screen are the same as those
entered for another VM (DPT). Change this so that the numbers do not overlap.
Q I have set the type of an extension port to "PC Console", but I cannot apply this setting. (Error E000402)
A •
DPT Type—Location No. on the 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port
Property - Extension Port screen is the same as that entered for another PC Console.
Change this so that the numbers do not overlap.
Q What programming do I have to perform to use a headset with an extension?
A •
Headset OFF/ON on the 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
screen to "Headset ON".
Q What programming do I have to perform to use XDP with an extension port?
A •
to "On".
XDP Mode on the 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port screen
Q How do I edit a Class of Service, or create a new Class of Service?
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 67
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
A •
Class of Service feature restrictions can be set from the 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service
Q How do I restrict calls between 2 extensions?
A •
Calls between extensions can be restricted from the 4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—
Internal Call Block screen. Click in the relevant cells to select the COS levels whose
extensions are blocked from calling each other.
Q How do I restrict CO line calls made by extensions?
A •
CO line calls made by extensions can be restricted from the 4.13 [2-7-2] Class of
Service—External Call Block screen. Click in the relevant cells to select the trunk
groups that cannot be used by extensions associated with a particular COS in each time mode.
To prevent extensions associated with a COS from making CO line calls, set all trunk groups for that COS to "Block" (blue).
Q How do I modify the hold operation for SLTs?
A • It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT using the
SLT—SLT Hold Mode option on the 4.18 [2-9] System Options screen.
For more details, see "3.1.4 Call Hold" of the Feature Manual.
Q How do I set up an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group to receive CO line calls directly?
A • Perform the following steps:
1.
2.
Click Apply.
3.
On the 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Member List screen, select the ICD group you created from the Incoming Call
Distribution drop-down list.
4.
Enter the extension numbers of member extensions in the Extension
5.
Click Apply.
6.
On the DIL tab of the 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings screen, enter the
floating extension number of the ICD group as the
Lunch, Break, Night of each time mode.
7.
Modify other settings as required from the Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Group submenu.
Q How do I set the queuing operation for an Incoming Call Distribution group?
A • Perform the following steps:
1.
On the 5.14 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
screen, set the actions as required for each queuing table.
2.
On the 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings screen,
from the Queuing Time Table tab, select the number of the Queuing Time Table
to use in each time mode.
Q How do I add an extension as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group?
68 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
A • Perform the following steps:
1.
On the 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Member List screen, from the Incoming Call Distribution drop-down list, select
the group you want to modify.
The ICD group must have an extension number set.
2.
Enter the extension number of the extension you want to add in a blank cell of the
3.
Set
4.
Click Apply.
Note that it is necessary to set the extension number of the ICD group in advance.
Q I cannot set system speed dialing numbers from PC Console.
A • Set the COS of the extension to which PC Console is connected to Manager class, by
Manager on the Extension Feature tab of the 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service
—COS Settings screen to "Enable".
• System speed dialing numbers can only be edited by one PC Console at a time.
Q I have set FWD through system programming, but calls are still not being forwarded.
A • Perform the following steps:
1.
Check that the
Call from CO—Present Button Status or Call from
Extension—Present Button Status of the target extension on the 6.3 [4-1-2]
Wired Extension—FWD/DND or 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
screen is set to "FWD".
2.
Create a FWD button on the target extension if one does not already exist.
3.
Press the FWD button so that it changes to FWD status.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 69
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
70 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Section 3
[1] Configuration
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 71
3.1 [1-1] Slot
3.1 [1-1] Slot
The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed.
Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a summary
To install a new card to the PBX
1.
Click on the name of the card to install in the list on the right.
An image of the card will be displayed to the left of the list, and information about the card will be shown below.
2.
Click and drag the image of the card to the free slot it is to be installed in, and release it.
The card will move into the slot space.
3.
Click Yes to confirm.
To switch between physical and virtual shelves of the PBX
1.
Move the mouse pointer over the PBX image at the top of the screen you wish to select.
Select Shelf will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2.
Click Select Shelf.
To access card properties
1.
Move the mouse pointer over a card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2.
Select Card Property.
The property screen for that card will be displayed.
To access port properties
1.
Move the mouse pointer over a card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2.
Select Port Property.
The property screen for that card’s port or ports will be displayed.
To remove a card from the PBX
1.
Move the mouse pointer over the card to remove.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2.
Select Delete.
3.
Click Yes to confirm.
The card will be removed.
To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card (Interactive mode only)
1.
Move the mouse pointer over the card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2.
Select the desired status:
• Click INS to set the card to in-service status.
• Click OUS to set the card to out-of-service status.
72 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.1 [1-1] Slot
To install an option card on an OPB3 card
1.
Move the mouse pointer over the card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2.
Select Option Card.
The OPB3 Option Card Setup screen will be displayed. See 3.35 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card
Supported Card Types
Card
IPCMPR: IP Convergence Main
Processing Card
DHLC4: 4-Port Digital Hybrid Extension
Card
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card
SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone
Extension Card
SLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone
Extension Card
LCOT4: 4-Port Analog CO Line Card
Maximum Quantity
1 (fixed)
KX-NCP500: 1
KX-NCP1000: 1
KX-NCP500: 1
KX-NCP1000: 2
Card Programming
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -
PRI23: PRI Card (23B channels)
T1: T-1 CO Line Card
KX-NCP500: 3
KX-NCP1000: 4
KX-NCP500: 2
KX-NCP1000: 2
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card
V-IPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel VoIP
Extension Card
V-SIPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel SIP
Extension Card
V-IPGW16: Virtual 16-Channel VoIP
Gateway Card
KX-NCP500: 2
KX-NCP1000: 3
KX-NCP500: 2
KX-NCP1000: 2
KX-NCP500: 1
KX-NCP1000: 2
KX-NCP500: 1
KX-NCP1000: 2
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual
For more information on the IPCMPR card, virtual cards and other optional cards, see the following sections in the Installation Manual:
– 1.3.1 Optional Equipment
– 3.3.1 IPCMPR Card
– 3.4.1 Virtual Cards
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 73
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Summary information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX.
Physical Shelf
Slot
Indicates the slot number (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Available slot numbers.
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Card Type
Indicates the type of service card installed in each slot of the physical shelf (reference only). Note that for
IPCMPR cards, the PBX model code is displayed in parentheses after the name.
Default
Slot 00: IPCMPR (IP Convergence Main Processing Card: fixed)
Other slots: Not stored.
Value Range
DHLC4: 4-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card
SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
SLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
LCOT4: 4-Port Analog CO Line Card
PRI23: PRI Card
T1: T-1 CO Line Card
OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card
IPCMPR: IPCMPR Card
Maintenance Console Location
74 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Programming Manual References
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Feature Manual References
None
Status
Indicates the card status (reference only).
Note that IPCMPR card status is always displayed as "-".
Default
Slot 00: - (fixed)
Other slots: Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Pre-Install: A card has been added to the slot.
Idle: No card is installed in the slot.
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Version
Indicates the LPR version of the installed card (reference only).
Default
Current version number
Value Range
Version number
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 75
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
IPCMPR Virtual Shelf
Slot
Indicates the slot number (reference only).
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Slot Type
Indicates the slot type (reference only).
Default
1–4: Trunk
5–8: Extension
Value Range
Trunk, Extension
Maintenance Console Location
76 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Card Type
Indicates the type of virtual VoIP card installed in each slot of the virtual shelf (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
V-IPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel VoIP Extension Card
V-SIPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel SIP Extension Card
V-IPGW16: Virtual 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card
V-SIPGW16: Virtual 16-Channel SIP Trunk Card
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Feature Manual References
None
Status
Indicates the card status (reference only).
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Pre-Install: A card has been added to the slot.
Idle: No card is installed in the slot.
Maintenance Console Location
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 77
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
78 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key
Refreshes and displays information on activation keys provided by activation key files on the SD memory card and preinstalled activation keys of the DSP card.
It is possible to program the number of provided IP Trunk channels to be used for H.323 and SIP CO lines. In the The number of activated IP-GW box, type the number of IP Trunk channels to be used for H.323 CO lines. The remaining number of IP Trunk channels will be used for SIP CO lines.
Similarly, you can program how many IP softphones can be used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary
Telephone activation key. In the The number of activated IP Softphone box, type the number of IP softphones to be used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone activation key. The remainder is the number of
IP-PTs that can be used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone activation key. At default, only IP softphones can be used.
IPCMPR-ID
Indicates the ID number of the IPCMPR card (reference only).
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
ID number of the IPCMPR card
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Activated Feature
Indicates the type of activation keys (reference only).
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
IP Trunk: IP Trunk Activation Key
IP Proprietary Telephone: IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key
IP Proprietary Telephone/IP Softphone: IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key
SIP Extension: SIP Extension Activation Key
Enhanced Features: Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version
Communication Assistant Basic (user): Activation Key for CA Basic
Communication Assistant Pro (user): Activation Key for CA PRO
Communication Assistant Supervisor (user): Activation Key for CA ACD Monitor
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 79
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
The number of activated feature by—VoIP-DSP Card
Indicates the number of channels provided by the DSP card (reference only).
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
For DSP4/DSP16 card:
IP Trunk (ch): 4
IP Proprietary Telephone (ch): 8
For DSP64 card:
IP Trunk (ch): 16
IP Proprietary Telephone (ch): 32
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
The number of activated feature by—Activation Key File in SD Card
Indicates the number of channels (or CA users) provided by activation key files on the SD memory card
(reference only).
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
80 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
The number of activated feature by——Total
Indicates the total number of channels (or CA users) provided by the DSP card and activation key files on the
SD memory card (reference only).
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 81
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
The properties of the IPCMPR card can be specified.
LAN Setting
DHCP Client
Enables the DHCP Client function to assign IP address information automatically to the IPCMPR card.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Assignment
MAC Address for IPCMPR Card
Indicates the MAC address of the IPCMPR card (reference only).
Default
Default MAC address
Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–AA:AA:AA:AA:AA:AA
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
82 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
IP Address for IPCMPR Card
Specifies the IP address of the IPCMPR card. This parameter is only available for entering values when DHCP
Client is disabled.
Default
192.168.0.101
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
MAC Address for VoIP-DSP
Indicates the MAC address of either the DSP card (reference only).
Default
Default MAC address
Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–AA:AA:AA:AA:AA:AA
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
IP Address for VoIP-DSP
Specifies the IP address of either the DSP card. This parameter is only available for entering values when
DHCP Client is disabled.
Default
192.168.0.102
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 83
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Subnet Mask
Specifies the subnet mask address of the IPCMPR card. This parameter is only available for entering values when DHCP Client is disabled.
Default
255.255.255.0
Value Range
0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 (except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255)
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Default Gateway
Specifies the IP address of the default gateway for the network. This parameter is only available for entering values when DHCP Client is disabled.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
0.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
84 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Speed/Duplex for Main Port
Specifies the connection mode of the main port. The connection is made in 100Mbps/half duplex when Auto
Negotiation fails.
Default
Auto Negotiation
Value Range
Auto Negotiation
100Mbps/full duplex
100Mbps/half duplex
10Mbps/full duplex
10Mbps/half duplex
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Speed/Duplex for Maintenance Port
Specifies the connection mode of the maintenance port. The connection is made in 100Mbps/half duplex when
Auto Negotiation fails.
Default
Auto Negotiation
Value Range
Auto Negotiation
100Mbps/full duplex
100Mbps/half duplex
10Mbps/full duplex
10Mbps/half duplex
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 85
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
LAN Disconnect Decision Time
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before disconnecting LAN connection when no communication via the LAN is detected.
Default
5 s
Value Range
1–10 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
DHCP Port Number
Specifies the port number used by a DHCP server.
Default
67
Value Range
1–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
86 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Feature Manual References
4.1.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Assignment
DHCP Time Out
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive IP addressing information from a DHCP server.
Default
10 s
Value Range
1–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Assignment
VoIP-DSP Option
DSP Card Type
Indicates the type of the installed DSP card (reference only).
Default
None
Value Range
None, DSP4, DSP16, DSP64
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
DSP Card Status
Indicates whether the DSP card is enabled for use (reference only).
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 87
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
IPCMPR-SVM TS Circuit Availability
Specifies whether the built-in ESVM card of the PBX is enabled or disabled.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
IP Extension Count of BGM
Specifies how many IP-PTs connected to the IPCMPR card can send out BGM.
Default
4
Value Range
When using the built-in ESVM card:
0–49
88 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
When not using the built-in ESVM card:
0–53
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Feature Manual References
2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)
Version
Indicates the program software file version of the installed DSP card (reference only).
Default
Current version number
Value Range
Version number
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Jitter Compensation Operation for G.711
Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for voice communications using G.711 CODEC.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 89
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Jitter Compensation Operation for G.711 FAX
Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for fax communications using G.711 CODEC.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Jitter Compensation Operation for G.729A
Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for communications using G.729A CODEC.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
90 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for Voice
Specifies the minimum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.
Default
20 ms
Value Range
0–200 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Jitter Buffer Delay Max. for Voice
Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.
Default
200 ms
Value Range
0–200 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Jitter Buffer Delay Init. for Voice
Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.
Default
20 ms
Value Range
0–200 ms
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 91
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period for Voice
Specifies the length of time that the jitter buffer is applied for voice communications.
Default
1800 ms
Value Range
1000–65530 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for FAX
Specifies the minimum size of the jitter buffer for fax communications.
Default
20 ms
Value Range
0–200 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
92 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Feature Manual References
None
Jitter Buffer Delay Max. for FAX
Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for fax communications.
Default
200 ms
Value Range
0–200 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Jitter Buffer Delay Init. for FAX
Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for fax communications.
Default
50 ms
Value Range
0–200 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period for FAX
Specifies the length of time that the jitter buffer is applied for fax communications.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 93
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Default
1800 ms
Value Range
1000–65530 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
DTMF Detection Level for G.711A
Specifies the level of DTMF detection for the G.711A CODEC.
Default
-23 dB
Value Range
-45– -12 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
DTMF Detection Level for G.711µ
Specifies the level of DTMF detection for the G.711µ CODEC.
Default
-29 dB
Value Range
-39– -6 dB
94 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON)
Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal.
Default
500 ms
Value Range
20–5000 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 2 (OFF)
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until another CNG signal is detected.
Default
3000 ms
Value Range
20–5000 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 95
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Feature Manual References
None
CNG Signal Fixation Detection Counter
Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation.
Default
1
Value Range
1–3
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
CED Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON Min.)
Specifies the minimum length of time required for the CED signal to be detected by the PBX.
Default
2400 ms
Value Range
20–5000 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
CED Signal Effective Detection Width 2 (ON Max.)
Specifies the maximum length of time that the CED signal can be detected by the PBX.
96 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Default
4000 ms
Value Range
20–5000 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port Number
Maintenance Port Number
Specifies the port number used to operate Maintenance Console via the LAN.
Default
35300
Value Range
1–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
LOGIN Port Number
Specifies the port number used to login to the PBX via the LAN.
Default
33321
Value Range
1–65535
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 97
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
CTI Port Number
Specifies the port number used to operate CTI via the LAN. Selecting "0" disables the 3rd Party CTI feature.
Default
33333
Value Range
0–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
Built-in Communication Assistant Server
Specifies the port number for the Communication Assistant (CA) application.
Default
33334
Value Range
1024–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 9—
Built-in Communication Assistant
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 9—
Built-in Communication Assistant
98 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 CA (Communication Assistant)
LAN Status
LINK for Main Port
Indicates the current connection status of the main port (reference only).
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Disconnect, Connect
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
LINK for Maintenance Port
Indicates the current connection status of the maintenance port (reference only).
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Disconnect, Connect
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 99
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
DHCP
DHCP Client
Indicates the DHCP client function status of the IPCMPR card (reference only).
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Assignment
IP Address for IPCMPR Card
Indicates the IP address of the IPCMPR card (reference only).
Default
192.168.0.101
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
IP Address for VoIP-DSP
Indicates the IP address of either the DSP card (reference only).
Default
192.168.0.102
100 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Subnet Mask
Indicates the subnet mask address of the IPCMPR card (reference only).
Default
255.255.255.0
Value Range
0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 (except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255)
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Default Gateway
Indicates the IP address of the default gateway for the network (reference only).
Default
0.0.0.0
Value Range
0.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 101
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
102 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
The properties of the built-in 2-channel SVM (Simplified Voice Message) and OGM (Outgoing Message) features can be specified. To change the status of the built-in ESVM card, click Command.
Only the following parameters can be set. Other parameters on this screen are only applicable for the Optional
Base card. See 3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property for details.
Slot
Indicates the slot type (reference only).
Default
IPCMPR
Value Range
IPCMPR
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Sub-Slot
Indicates the sub-slot number (reference only).
Default
Current sub-slot number
Value Range
Sub-slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 103
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Feature Card Type
Indicates the feature type of each sub-slot (reference only).
Default
Current feature type
Value Range
In sub-slot 1–2:
Reserve: No feature is installed.
In sub-slot 3:
ESVM2: Built-in ESVM card is installed.
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Status
Indicates the status of the feature type of each slot (reference only).
The sub-slot 3 column offers two ways to open the screen to select the card command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
For sub-slot 1–2:
Not applicable.
For sub-slot 3:
INS: Built-in ESVM card is activated.
OUS: Built-in ESVM card is not activated.
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
104 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Feature Manual References
None
Port Number
Indicates the port number of the built-in ESVM card (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port Status
Indicates the port status of the built-in ESVM card (reference only).
Default
Current port status
Value Range
For sub-slot 1–2:
Not applicable.
For sub-slot 3:
INS: The card is activated.
OUS: The card is not activated.
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
PC Programming Manual 105
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
SVM Feature
Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature. It is possible to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature, as an MSG card (OGM feature), or both.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—
Feature Manual References
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
MSG Feature
Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card as an MSG card (OGM feature). It is possible to use the
ESVM card for the SVM feature, as an MSG card (OGM feature), or both.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—
Feature Manual References
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
106 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Commands for the built-in ESVM card feature can be programmed.
INS
Puts the feature in service.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
OUS
Takes the feature out of service.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 107
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP Gateway port.
To change the status of virtual IP Gateway ports, click Command.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
108 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Call Distribution Port Group
Specifies a call distribution port group to which incoming CO line calls are directed through the virtual VoIP gateway port.
Default
1
Value Range
1–16
Maintenance Console Location
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.2 Call Distribution Port Group
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 109
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port—Connection Command
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port
—Connection Command
Commands for the virtual IP gateway ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Feature Manual References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Feature Manual References
None
110 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Common settings for all of the V-IPGW cards installed in the IPCMPR Virtual Shelf can be programmed.
Main
Gatekeeper Available
Specifies whether to use a gatekeeper. This setting can only be changed when all V-IPGW cards are set to
OUS.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Call Signalling Model
Specifies whether to carry out a call control (H.225) process directly between the cards or through a gatekeeper.
Default
Direct
Value Range
Direct, GateKeeper
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 111
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Gatekeeper Connection Checking Interval (min)
Specifies the time between periodic checks of connection to the gatekeeper.
Default
0
Value Range
0 (disabled), 1–1440 min
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Primary Gatekeeper IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the primary gatekeeper.
Default
192.168.1.3
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Primary Gatekeeper Port Number
Specifies the port number of the primary gatekeeper.
Default
1719
Value Range
1–65535
112 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Secondary Gatekeeper IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the secondary gatekeeper.
Default
192.168.1.4
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Secondary Gatekeeper Port Number
Specifies the port number of the secondary gatekeeper.
Default
1719
Value Range
1–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 113
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Feature Manual References
None
H.225 Port Number
Specifies the port number for the H.225 protocol (call control) in an H.323 protocol suite.
Default
1720
Value Range
1–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
RAS Port Number
Specifies the port number for the H.225 protocol (RAS) in an H.323 protocol suite.
Default
1719
Value Range
1–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
QSIG Connectionless Tunneling TCP Port Number
Specifies the TCP port number for connectionless tunneling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network.
114 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Default
1718
Value Range
1–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
QSIG Connectionless Tunneling UDP Port Number
Specifies the UDP port number for connectionless tunneling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network.
Default
1717
Value Range
1–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
H.323 Dynamic Port Number
Specifies the starting port number from which 448 contiguous ports are used as dynamic ports.
Default
10000
Value Range
1–65000
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 115
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
RTCP Packet Sending Ability
Specifies whether to enable the PBX to send RTCP packets.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
RTCP Packet Interval
Specifies the length of time until the PBX retries to send RTCP packets when no reply is received.
Default
5 s
Value Range
5–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
116 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Feature Manual References
None
RTP QoS Available
Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field of the packet.
Default
ToS
Value Range
ToS, DSCP, HEX
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
RTP QoS-ToS Priority
Specifies the priority level in the ToS field.
Default
0
Value Range
0–7
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
RTP QoS-ToS Type
Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 117
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Default
Normal
Value Range
Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
RTP QoS-DSCP
Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ.
Default
0
Value Range
0–63
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
RTP QoS-HEX
Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number.
Default
00
Value Range
00–FF
118 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Echo Canceller Ability
Specifies the echo canceller ability time.
Default
48 ms
Value Range
OFF, 48 ms, 128 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
DSP Digital Gain (Down)
Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
Default
0 dB
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 119
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
DSP Digital Gain (Up)
Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.
Default
0 dB
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.
Default
0 dB
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.
120 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Default
Weak
Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
QSIG-CT
Enables a call to be transferred to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network.
Default
Yes
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.24 Private Network Features—QSIG—CT (Call Transfer)
QSIG-CF
Enables a call to be forwarded to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network. When using the
Centralized VM feature, set this to "No".
Default
Yes
Value Range
No, Yes
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 121
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.22 Private Network Features—QSIG—CF (Call Forwarding)
Trunk Property
Indicates the networking type of each CO line.
Default
Current networking type
Value Range
Public, Private, VPN
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Outgoing Call
En-bloc Dialing setting
Selects the call dialing mode.
Default
Overlap
Value Range
En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialed digits at once after the extension user completes dialing. The PBX recognizes the end of dialing when (1) # is dialed, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed telephone number is dialed, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
Overlap: The PBX sends dialed digits one at a time.
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
122 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.25 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)
Overlap—First-digit Timer (T302-1)
Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a dial number must be dialed after seizing a virtual IP
CO line.
Default
20 s
Value Range
5–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Overlap—Inter-digit Timer (T302-2)
Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a dial number must be dialed.
Default
5 s
Value Range
1–10 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 123
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Overlap—Dial End Code
Specifies the delimiter code to be used to signal the end of a dialed number.
Default
#
Value Range
0–9, #, *
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Incoming Call
Voice Activity Detection for G.711
Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 CODEC. This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Voice Codec Priority 1st
Specifies the highest priority CODEC type. For fax communications, it is necessary to specify G.711A or G.
711µ for this parameter.
124 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Default
G.729A
Value Range
G.711A, G.711µ, G.729A
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Voice Codec Priority 2nd
Specifies the second highest priority CODEC type.
Default
None
Value Range
None, G.711A, G.711µ, G.729A
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Voice Codec Priority 3rd
Specifies the third highest priority CODEC type.
Default
None
Value Range
None, G.711A, G.711µ, G.729A
Document Version 2008-09
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
PC Programming Manual 125
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Packet Sampling Time for G.711A
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Default
20 ms
Value Range
10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Packet Sampling Time for G.711µ
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Default
20 ms
Value Range
10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
126 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Feature Manual References
None
Packet Sampling Time for G.729A
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Default
20 ms
Value Range
10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
FAX Detection Ability
Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a CODEC other than G.711 cannot be received accurately at the destination, this feature automatically switches the CODEC to G.711 to enable end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Incoming Call— Voice Codec Priority 1st
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 127
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
DTMF
Specifies the type of DTMF tone to be sent out.
Default
Outband (H.245)
Value Range
Inband, Outband (RFC2833), Outband (H.245)
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Payload Type
Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if
DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).
Default
101
Value Range
96–127
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
T.38 FAX Max Datagram
Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T.38 protocol.
Default
512
128 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Value Range
272–512
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
T.38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy
Specifies whether to enable the redundancy feature when using the T.38 protocol.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
T.38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages
Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol.
Default
3
Value Range
0–7
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 129
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
T.38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data
Specifies the redundancy count for data when using the T.38 protocol.
Default
0
Value Range
0–3
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
T.38 FAX Rate Management Method
Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol.
Default
Transferred TCF
Value Range
Transferred TCF, Local TCF
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
130 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Timer
T301
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call.
Default
1800 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–18000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
T302
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving.
Default
150 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
T303
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message.
Default
60 ´ 100 ms
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 131
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
T304
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending.
Default
300 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
T305
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message.
Default
150 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
132 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
T308
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message.
Default
40 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
T309
Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call.
Default
120 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 133
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
T310
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a continuance message after receiving the Incoming Call
Proceeding message.
Default
1000 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
T313
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message.
Default
60 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
T316
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message.
Default
0 ´ 100 ms
134 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
T318
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message.
Default
0 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
T319
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message.
Default
0 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 135
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
T322
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message.
Default
40 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
T3D3
Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode.
Default
50 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
136 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
T3D9
Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode.
Default
200 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 137
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GK Settings
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—
GK Settings
Gatekeeper registration information can be programmed.
Destination Number
Specifies a telephone number to register with a gatekeeper.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 30 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GK Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Device Name
Specifies the name of the device for programming reference.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GK Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
138 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—
GW Settings
The settings related to destination gateway devices can be programmed. The following parameters can be specified for a maximum of 512 destination gateway devices.
Main
GW Name
Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
GW IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the destination gateway device.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 139
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
GW Group
Specifies the number of the gateway group to which the gateway entry belongs. A maximum of 256 gateway groups can be created.
Default
None
Value Range
1–256, None
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Connection for IP-GW16
Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature between the V-IPGW and KX-TDE/KX-TDA
IP-GW16 cards.
Default
Enable (TDA)
Value Range
Disable (TDE), Enable (TDA)
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Protocol
Specifies the type of protocol for connectionless tunneling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network.
Default
TCP
140 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Value Range
TCP, UDP
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Progress Tone Send Mode
Specifies whether to send call progress tones to the destination. When selecting External, call progress tones are audible at the destination.
Default
Internal
Value Range
External, Internal
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Option 1
GW Name
Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 141
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
IP Codec Priority—1st, 2nd, 3rd
Specifies the priority of the CODECs to be used. For fax communications, it is necessary to specify G.711A or G.711Mu for 1st priority.
Default
1st: G.729A
2nd: None
3rd: None
Value Range
For 1st:
G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A
For 2nd and 3rd:
None, G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Packet Sampling Time (G.711A)
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Default
20 ms
Value Range
10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
142 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu)
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Default
20 ms
Value Range
10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Default
20 ms
Value Range
10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 143
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Feature Manual References
None
Option 2
GW Name
Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Voice Activity Detection for G.711
Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 CODEC. This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
144 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
FAX Detection Ability
Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a CODEC other than G.711 cannot be received accurately at the destination, this feature automatically switches the CODEC to G.711 to enable end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings—Option 1—
Feature Manual References
None
DTMF
Specifies the method to transport DTMF tones.
Default
Outband (H.245)
Value Range
Inband, Outband (RFC2833), Outband (H.245)
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Payload Type
Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if
DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 145
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Default
101
Value Range
96–127
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
146 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—
DN2IP
The related settings of the address translation of telephone numbers and IP addresses can be programmed.
Leading Number
Specifies the leading digits in dialed numbers by which to associate calls with the appropriate destination.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 30 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Remaining Number of Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be dialed following the leading number to access the destination.
Default
0
Value Range
0–29
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 147
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP
GW No./GW Group Selection
Specifies the type of destination when making calls: a gateway device or a gateway group.
Default
GW No.
Value Range
GW Group, GW No.
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
GW Group
Specifies the number of the destination gateway group.
Default
1
Value Range
1–256
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
GW No.
Specifies the number of the destination gateway device.
Default
1
Value Range
1–512
148 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 149
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—
Hunt Pattern
The related settings of hunt patterns can be programmed. The hunt pattern determines how to route incoming calls through virtual IP CO lines to the PBX.
A maximum of 32 hunt patterns can be programmed.
Hunt Pattern 1–16
Leading Number
Specifies the leading digits of dialed numbers by which to determine the call distribution port group to direct incoming calls.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 30 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Call Distribution Port Group—1st–16th
Specifies the number of the call distribution port group to which incoming calls are directed in priority.
Default
1st: CDPG1
2nd–16th: None
Value Range
For 1st:
CDPG1–CDPG16
For 2nd–16th:
None, CDPG1–CDPG16
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern
150 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern
Programming Manual References
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port—
Feature Manual References
3.1.2 Call Distribution Port Group
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 151
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
The properties of the V-IPEXT card can be specified.
Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server)
Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony
Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Default
9300
Value Range
1–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Signalling (MGCP) UDP Port No. (Server)
Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive MGCP (Media Gateway Control
Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Default
2727
Value Range
1–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
152 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Signalling (MGCP) UDP Port No. (IP-PT)
Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data on the
IP-PT side. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Default
2427
Value Range
1–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (Server)
Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
For voice communications, the V-IPEXT card uses 64 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified here.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Default
12000
Value Range
1–65000
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 153
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (IP-PT)
Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol) data on the IP-PT side.
This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
For voice communications, an IP-PT uses 64 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified here.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Default
8000
Value Range
1–65000
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Keep Alive Time-Out
Specifies the length of time that the PBX will continue to consider an IP-PT to be active even if it receives no transmissions from that IP-PT. The PBX constantly confirms the status of IP-PTs. If no communications are received from an IP-PT for the duration specified here, the PBX considers the IP-PT to be unreachable, and sets the port status to Fault.
During operation, set between 10 s and 60 s. Settings over 60 s, and Disable, are used for debugging purposes, and IP-PTs cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these circumstances. Do not use debugging settings unless instructed to do so.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Default
20 s
Value Range
Disable, 10–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
154 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
First Resending Time (PTAP)
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony
Administration Protocol).
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Default
500 ms
Value Range
500 ´ n (n=1–16) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Resending Time Out (PTAP)
Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending PTAP (Panasonic Telephony
Administration Protocol).
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Default
150 s
Value Range
150–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 155
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
First Resending Time (MGCP)
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend MGCP (Media Gateway Control
Protocol).
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Default
500 ms
Value Range
500 ´ n (n=1–8) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Resending Time Out (MGCP)
Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending MGCP (Media Gateway Control
Protocol).
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Default
75 s
Value Range
75–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Echo Canceller Ability
Specifies the echo canceller ability time.
156 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Default
48 ms
Value Range
OFF, 48 ms, 128 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
DSP Digital Gain (Down)
Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
Default
-6 dB
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
DSP Digital Gain (Up)
Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.
Default
0 dB
Value Range
-14–6 dB
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 157
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.
Default
-4 dB
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.
Default
Weak
Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
158 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 159
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP extension port.
To change the status of virtual IP extension ports, click Command.
IP-PT Registration and De-registration
An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used.
Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
It is possible to de-register the IP-PT later.
Preparation
Open 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR, and confirm that the IP addresses of the IPCMPR and DSP
cards, subnet mask address, and default gateway address are set.
Registration
Follow the steps below to register the IP-PT.
1.
Connect the IP-PT to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.
2.
Click Registration.
A dialog box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension numbers are displayed on the left.
3.
Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
A screen will appear with information on the current IP-PT extension number and index number for programming.
4.
Program the relevant IP-PT.
5.
Click Next.
• If the registration is still in process, the dialog box will show "Waiting for IP-PT to register…". Click
OK.
• If the registration is successful, the dialog box will show "Registration Succeed".
If there are more IP-PTs to be registered, click Continue to resume or Cancel to terminate the registration. If not, click Close.
• Click Automatic response to register several IP-PTs automatically.
Clicking this button means that all remaining IP-PTs will be registered without having to click any other buttons.
Once the IP-PT is successfully registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "Registered".
De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register the IP-PT.
1.
Click De-registration.
A dialog box will appear. Registered extension numbers are displayed on the left.
2.
Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialog box will appear.
3.
Click Confirm.
• If the de-registration is successful, the dialog box will show "De-registration Succeed".
• If the de-registration is unsuccessful, the dialog box will show "De-registration Error".
De-registration will be terminated.
4.
Click Close.
If the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "None".
160 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the IP-PT when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful or IP address settings have been changed or deleted only on the IP-PT.
1.
Click Forced De-registration.
A dialog box will appear. Registered extension numbers are displayed on the left.
2.
Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next.
A dialog box will appear.
3.
Click OK.
A dialog box will appear.
4.
Click Confirm.
• If the de-registration is successful, the dialog box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed".
5.
Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "None".
Main
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 161
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.
To change the extension number of an extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
Starting at 101
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Extension Name
Specifies the extension name of the port.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
162 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
This cell is only active when Status on this screen shows Registered.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Status
Indicates whether a certain IP-PT is registered (reference only).
Default
None
Value Range
None, Registered
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 163
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
MAC Address
Indicates the MAC address of the IP-PT (reference only).
Default
MAC address
Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–AA:AA:AA:AA:AA:AA
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Current IP Address
Indicates the current IP address of the IP-PT (reference only).
Default
Current IP address
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Program Ver.
Indicates the program software file version of the IP-PT (reference only).
Default
Current version number
Value Range
Version number
164 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Option
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
PC Programming Manual 165
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.
To change the extension number of an extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
Starting at 101
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Extension Name
Specifies the extension name of the port.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
166 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
This cell is only active when Status on this screen shows Registered.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Headset OFF/ON
Turns on or off the use of a headset with the IP-PT.
Default
Headset OFF
Value Range
Headset OFF, Headset ON
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Ringing Tone
Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 167
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Default
A
Value Range
A: 64 ms (697 Hz), 64 ms (852 Hz)
B: 32 ms (697 Hz), 32 ms (852 Hz)
C: 128 ms (697 Hz), 128 ms (852 Hz)
D: 32 ms (697 Hz), 96 ms (852 Hz)
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
IP Codec Priority
Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data.
Default
G.722
Value Range
G.711, G.729A, G.722
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Packet Sampling Time (G.711/G.722)
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Default
20 ms
168 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 60 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Default
20 ms
Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 60 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 169
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension—Connection Command
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
—Connection Command
Commands for the virtual IP extension ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Feature Manual References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Feature Manual References
None
170 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
The properties of the virtual SIP Extension card can be specified.
UDP Port No. for SIP Extension Server
Specifies the UDP port number used for the SIP Extension server.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Default
5060
Value Range
1–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations
SIP Location Hold Time Max.
Specifies the maximum length of time that the PBX holds information on the location of SIP Extensions.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Default
320 s
Value Range
10–3600 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 171
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
SIP Location Hold Time Min.
Specifies the minimum length of time that the PBX holds information on the location of SIP Extensions.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Default
300 s
Value Range
10–3600 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations
SIP Location Hold Time Interval
Specifies the interval time that the PBX waits before starting to hold information on location of SIP Extensions.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Default
1 s
Value Range
1–10 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations
SIP Session Timer Min.
Specifies the minimum length of time that the PBX waits before disconnecting SIP sessions when no communication is detected.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
172 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Default
90 s
Value Range
90–3600 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations
Echo Canceller Ability
Specifies the echo canceller ability time.
Default
48 ms
Value Range
OFF, 48 ms, 128 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
DSP Digital Gain (Down)
Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
Default
0 dB
Value Range
-14–6 dB
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 173
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
DSP Digital Gain (Up)
Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.
Default
0 dB
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.
Default
0 dB
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
174 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Feature Manual References
16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.
Default
Weak
Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 175
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Port
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual SIP extension port.
To change the status of virtual SIP extension ports, click Command.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
176 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.
To change the extension number of an extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
Starting at 101
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
Password
Specifies the password used for registering a SIP Extension to the PBX. While it is possible to enter a password manually for each SIP Extension, you can copy Extension Number to Password clicking Copy to button. This parameter can only be modified when the virtual SIP extension port is set to OUS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
3–16 characters (consisting of 0–9, a–z, A–Z)
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 177
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
This cell is only active when Status on this screen shows Registered.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
Current IP Address
Indicates the current IP address of the SIP Extension (reference only).
Default
Current IP address
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
Bearer
Selects the bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set to Speech automatically.
178 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Default
Automatic
Value Range
Automatic, Speech, Audio
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
Packet Sampling Time (G.711/G.722)
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Default
20 ms
Value Range
10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Default
20 ms
Value Range
10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 179
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
Voice Activity Detection for G.711
Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for G.711 CODEC. This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF, ON
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
Voice Activity Detection for G.729A
Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for G.729A CODEC. This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF, ON
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
180 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Feature Manual References
16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 181
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port—Connection Command
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Port—Connection Command
Commands for the virtual SIP extension ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Feature Manual References
16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
OUS
Takes the port out of service.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Feature Manual References
16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
182 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
The property for the extension cards can be specified.
SLT Pulse Dial Mode
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.
Default
Normal
Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
SLT Off Hook Time
Specifies the minimum length that a pulse dial sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognize it as an off-hook signal.
Default
160 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 183
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
SLT Off Hook Guard Time
Specifies the length of guard time used for off-hook signals from SLTs, to prevent the PBX mistaking them for pulse dials.
Default
504 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=12–63) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
SLT Pulse Maximum Break Width
Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.
Default
96 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=9–20) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
SLT Pulse Minimum Make Width
Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.
Default
8 ms
184 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=1–5) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
SLT Flash Detection
Enables the PBX to detect the flash signal sent when an SLT user presses the hookswitch or the Flash/Recall button.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable: The PBX disconnects the line to prevent placing the call on hold.
Enable: The PBX places the call on consultation hold.
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.9 Call Splitting
Flash Timing - Min.
Specifies the minimum length that a signal sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognize it as a hookswitch flash signal.
Default
112 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–63) ms
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 185
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Flash Timing - Range
Specifies the maximum length that a signal sent from an SLT can be for the PBX to recognize it as a hookswitch flash signal.
Default
904 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–191) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
DTMF-R STD Detection Time
Specifies the minimum length that a DTMF tone must be for the PBX to recognize it as a DTMF tone.
Default
30 ms
Value Range
2 ´ n (n=1–31) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
186 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Feature Manual References
None
APT/SLT Parallel Ring
Enables an SLT connected in parallel to an APT to ring with the APT for calls.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 187
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Various settings can be programmed for each extension port.
To change the status of extension ports, click Command. To view total numbers of each type of extension connected, click Port Type View.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port or channel number (reference only).
Default
Current port or channel number
Value Range
Port or channel number
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.7 Extension Port Configuration
188 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Port Type
Indicates the port type (reference only).
Default
Current port type
Value Range
DPT: DPT port (DLC)
SLT: SLT port (SLC)
S-Hybrid: Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
S-Hybrid(SLT): XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
S-Hybrid(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
DPT(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of DPT port (DLC)
IP-EXT: Virtual IP-Extension port (V-IPEXT)
SIP: Virtual SIP Extension port (V-SIPEXT)
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.7 Extension Port Configuration
Telephone Type
Indicates the connected telephone type (reference only).
The number of all connected telephones and Cell Stations can be viewed by clicking Port Type View.
Default
Current connected telephone type
Value Range
DPT (40V): DPT is connected.
APT (15V): APT is connected.
DSS: DSS Console is connected.
VM: VPS is connected.
SLT: SLT is connected (or no telephone is connected to the Super Hybrid or SLT port).
CS: CS is connected.
CS-M: High-density CS is connected with its master port.
CS-S1–3: High-density CS is connected with its slave port.
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 189
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View
Feature Manual References
5.1.7 Extension Port Configuration
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command as follows:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the PBX.
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Extension numbers of PSs can be a maximum of 4 digits.
Default
Starting at 101
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
190 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the extension name of the port.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
XDP Mode
Turns XDP mode on or off for the port. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to
S-Hybrid.
Default
Off
Value Range
On: XDP enabled (The main telephone and sub telephone have different extension numbers. This is called
XDP Mode.)
Off: XDP disabled (The main telephone and sub telephone both have the main telephone’s extension number.
This is called Parallel Mode.)
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 191
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone
5.1.7 Extension Port Configuration
Parallel Telephone Ringing
Specifies whether the sub telephone (SLT) rings at the same time as the main telephone (DPT) for an incoming call. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to S-Hybrid.
Default
Yes
Value Range
Yes, No
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone
DPT Type—Type
Selects the port type.
To change the port type of an extension port, follow the steps below:
1.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS".
2.
Change the port type of the extension port, then click Apply.
3.
Set the status of the extension port to "INS".
When changing the port type of an extension port for which
Wireless XDP has been set on the
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings screen, the Wireless XDP setting must be deleted
first.
When changing the type of a port for which one or more SDN buttons are set (except when changing between PC Console and Telephone), all SDN buttons customized for that device will be deleted. When you attempt to apply the new settings, a warning message is displayed showing the slot and port number for which SDN buttons will be deleted. If you do not wish to delete SDN buttons for this port, click
Cancel.
Default
Normal
Value Range
Normal: For connecting a DPT
192 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
DSS: For connecting a DSS Console (A maximum of 8 DSS Consoles can be connected to the PBX.)
VM (DPT): For connecting a Panasonic VPS through DPT Integration
PC Console: For connecting a PC Console (A maximum of 8 PC Consoles can be connected to the PBX.)
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
DPT Type—Location No.
Specifies the location number of the connected DSS Console or PC Console. This setting is only available when
DPT Type—Type on this screen is set to DSS or PC Console.
Note that, depending on system traffic, there may be a limit to the number of PC Consoles that can be supported by a single DLC/DHLC card.
When changing the location number of a DSS Console for which one or more SDN buttons are set, all SDN buttons customized for that device will be deleted. When you attempt to apply the new settings, a warning message is displayed showing the slot and port number for which SDN buttons will be deleted. If you do not wish to delete SDN buttons for this port, click Cancel.
Default
1
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
13.1.5 PC Console/PC Phone
DPT Type—VM Unit No.
Selects the unit number of the connected VPS. This setting is only available when
this screen is set to VM (DPT).
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 193
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Default
1
Value Range
1, 2
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
DPT Type—VM Port No.
Specifies the VM port number for the port. This setting is only available when
screen is set to VM (DPT).
Default
1
Value Range
1–12
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Headset OFF/ON
Turns on or off the use of a headset with a DPT. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to DPT, DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, or S-Hybrid(S-DPT).
Default
Headset OFF
Value Range
Headset OFF, Headset ON
194 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
8.1.3 Headset Operation
Ringing Tone
Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls when Port Type on this screen is set to DPT, DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, S-Hybrid(SLT), or S-Hybrid(S-DPT). This setting is not available for the
KX-T7200, the KX-T7451, APTs, or SLTs.
Default
A
Value Range
A: 64 ms (697 Hz), 64 ms (852 Hz)
B: 32 ms (697 Hz), 32 ms (852 Hz)
C: 128 ms (697 Hz), 128 ms (852 Hz)
D: 32 ms (697 Hz), 96 ms (852 Hz)
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 195
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—
Connection Command
Commands for the extension ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of repair.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
196 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port
Type View
Displays the number of connected telephones and Cell Stations (CSs).
This screen can only be accessed in Interactive mode.
Type
Indicates the types of telephone (reference only).
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
New-DPT (KX-DT300 series/KX-T7600 series DPTs), Old-DPT (DPTs other than KX-DT300 series/
KX-T7600 series), APT, SLT, DSS Console, VM, Other, CS, High-density CS, IP-EXT, IP-PT, SIP
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Total Count
Indicates the total number of each type of telephone and CS connected to the PBX (reference only). CSs are counted on the basis of the number of ports in service plus the number of extension ports to which CSs are connected.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 197
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View
Feature Manual References
None
198 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
The properties of the analog CO line cards can be specified.
Outgoing Guard Time
Specifies the length of time after a CO line is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.
Default
3 s
Value Range
3–6 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
First Dial Timer (CO)
Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a CO line, before sending the dialed digits to the telephone company. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialed digits correctly.
Default
1.0 s
Value Range
0.5 ´ n (n=1–16) s
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 199
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
CO Feed Back Tone
Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing CO line calls, audible tones can be heard as the dialed number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialed.
Default
Yes
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Bell Detection—Bell Start Detection Timer
Specifies the minimum length of a bell signal that can be recognized by the PBX as the bell signal sent from the telephone company, before the PBX detects an arriving call.
Default
144 ms
Value Range
24 ´ n (n=1–50) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Bell Detection—Bell Off Detection Timer
Specifies the duration of the bell off detection timer. If the PBX receives no bell signal from the telephone company for the length of time specified here, the PBX treats the call as lost.
Default
6.0 s
200 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Value Range
1.0 s–15.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Pulse / DTMF Dial—DTMF Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialed digits correctly.
Default
112 ms
Value Range
64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–11) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Pulse / DTMF Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialed digits correctly.
Default
830 ms
Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 201
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break
Specifies the % break for a low speed pulse dial. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make
(off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.
Default
60 %
Value Range
Other, 60 %, 67 %
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Manual References
None
Low Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width
% Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
Default
60 ms
Value Range
4 ´ n (n=6–20) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
202 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Feature Manual References
None
Low Speed Pulse Dial—Make Width
% Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
Default
40 ms
Value Range
4 ´ n (n=3–15) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Manual References
None
High Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break
Specifies the % break for a high speed pulse dial. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.
Default
60 %
Value Range
Other, 60 %, 67 %
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 203
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
High Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width
Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a high speed pulse dial.
Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
Default
32 ms
Value Range
4 ´ n (n=4–18) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Manual References
None
High Speed Pulse Dial—Make Width
% Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
Default
20 ms
Value Range
4 ´ n (n=3–15) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Manual References
None
Pulse Type
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.
Default
Normal
204 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Option Card Equipment—Option 1 and Option 2
Indicates the type of the card that is installed on the LCOT card (reference only).
Default
Current option card type
Value Range
None, Caller ID Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Signaling
Selects the type of Caller ID signaling provided by the telephone company.
Default
FSK
Value Range
FSK, FSK (with Visual Caller ID), DTMF
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 205
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Caller ID—Max Receive Time
Specifies the maximum number of Caller ID series that are sent from the network.
Default
1
Value Range
0 (no limit), 1, 2, 3
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Carrier Detection
ID Signaling on this screen should be set to FSK.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
206 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) END Detection
Selects the method used to detect the end of Caller ID information.
Default
Length + Timer
Value Range
Length + Timer, Timer
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Header Examination
Caller ID Signaling on this screen should be set to FSK.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Start Timer
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before attempting to detect Caller ID information, after receiving a call. To enable this setting,
Caller ID—Caller ID Signaling on this screen should be set to FSK.
Default
80 ms
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 207
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Value Range
None, 80 ´ n (n=1–15) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Timer
ID—Caller ID Signaling on this screen should be set to FSK.
Default
2000 ms
Value Range
80 ´ n (n=13–50) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
208 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Various settings can be programmed for each analog CO line port.
To change the status of ports, click Command.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 209
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Maintenance Console Location
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Dialing Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the analog CO line.
Default
DTMF
Value Range
DTMF, Pulse
Maintenance Console Location
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.3 Dial Mode Selection
CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming CO line calls before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal is not detected.
210 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Default
400 ms
Value Range
None, 6.5 ms, 8 ´ n (n=1–112) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.22 CPC (Calling Party Control) Signal Detection
DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the analog CO line.
Default
80 ms
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the analog CO line.
Default
Low
Value Range
Low, High
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 211
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Reverse Detection
Selects the type of CO line call for which the reverse signal from the telephone company is detected.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: For no CO line call
Outgoing: For outgoing CO line calls only
Both Call: For both outgoing and incoming CO line calls
Maintenance Console Location
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Caller ID Detection
Enables the PBX to detect a Caller ID signal from the analog CO line.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
212 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Paytone Detection
Enables the PBX to receive a pay tone signal from the telephone company.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.
Default
1.5 s
Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.4 Pause Insertion
8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
16.1.5 Special Carrier Access Code
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 213
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.
Default
608 ms
Value Range
None, 16 ´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access)
Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a CO line is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.
Default
1.5 s
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate
214 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—
Connection Command
Commands for the LCO ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Manual References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of repair.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 215
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
The properties of the PRI card can be specified.
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T200
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN.
Default
10 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T202
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the request to use an ISDN line as a TIE line.
Default
20 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
216 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T203
Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2.
Default
100 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T301
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN.
Default
0 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–18000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T302
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving.
Default
150 ´ 100 ms
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 217
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T303
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to
ISDN.
Default
40 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T304
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending.
Default
300 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
218 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T305
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message to ISDN.
Default
300 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T308
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN.
Default
40 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 219
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T309
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call.
Default
120 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T310
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a continuance message after receiving the Incoming Call
Proceeding message.
Default
1100 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T313
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message.
Default
40 ´ 100 ms
220 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T316
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message.
Default
0 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T318
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message.
Default
0 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 221
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T319
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message.
Default
0 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T322
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message.
Default
40 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
222 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T3D3
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode.
Default
100 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T3D9
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode.
Default
200 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T200
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN.
Default
10 ´ 100 ms
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 223
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T201
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the TEI check request to ISDN.
Default
10 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T203
Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2.
Default
100 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
224 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T301
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN.
Default
0 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–18000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T302
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving.
Default
150 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 225
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
ISDN Extension—T303
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to
ISDN.
Default
40 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T304
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending.
Default
200 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T305
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message to ISDN.
Default
300 ´ 100 ms
226 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T306
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message to ISDN. This setting is used when inband tones are supplied.
Default
300 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T307
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX maintains a suspended call, before restarting.
Default
1800 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–6000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 227
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T308
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN.
Default
40 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T309
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call.
Default
120 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
228 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
ISDN Extension—T310
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message.
Default
400 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T312
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to
ISDN.
Default
60 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T316
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message.
Default
0 ´ 100 ms
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 229
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T320
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for packet protocol.
Default
0 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T322
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message.
Default
40 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
230 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T3D3
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode.
Default
300 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T3D9
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode.
Default
200 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 231
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Various settings can be programmed for each PRI port.
Main
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
232 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Note
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Default
CO
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
13.1.20 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES—QSIG
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 233
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Status Message
Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network.
Default
No Transmission
Value Range
No Transmission: Status Message is not sent.
When error detection (Mandatory): Send the Status Message when an error (Mandatory) is detected.
When error detection (Option / Mandatory): Send the Status Message when an error (Option or Mandatory) is detected.
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Status Receive
Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual status of the call.
Default
Ignore
Value Range
Ignore: Ignore the Status Message from the network.
Disconnect: Disconnect the call.
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
234 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Feature Manual References
None
Line Coding
Selects the line coding type of the PRI PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the port.
Default
B8ZS
Value Range
B8ZS, AMI
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Frame Sequence
Selects the type of frame sequence for the port.
Default
Extend Multi frame (ESF)
Value Range
Extend Multi frame (ESF), 4-Frame Multi frame (F4), 12-Frame Multi frame (F12)
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
CO Setting
CO Setting parameters are not applicable to ports assigned as Extension in
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 235
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Note
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
236 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Default
CO
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 237
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Ringback Tone to Outside Caller
Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN In/Out Call Type
Selects the method used to send dialed digits to the network.
Default
CO port: En-bloc
QSIG (slave/master) port: Overlap
Value Range
En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialed digits at once after the extension user completes dialing. The PBX recognizes the end of dialing when (1) # is dialed, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed telephone number is dialed, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
238 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Overlap: The PBX sends dialed digits one at a time.
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2—
End of Dial Plan—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode
Feature Manual References
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
Networking Data Transfer
Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only available when
Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master.
Default
No
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
Section 11 [9] Private Network
Feature Manual References
13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
Loopback Test started by Network
Enables a loopback test started from the network side, to be performed on the PRI23 card.
Note
The version of the PRI23 card must be 2.000 or later.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 239
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Setting
Extension Setting parameters are applicable only for the PRI extension port.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
240 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port Type
Selects the type of the port.
Note
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Default
CO
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 241
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Ring Mode (ISDN MSN Last No. 0 or 00)
Selects the ring mode when receiving an incoming call with an MSN ending with "0" or "00".
Default
Ring All Extension for MSN
Value Range
Ring All Extension for MSN: Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.
Ring AN Extension for MSN: Ring only one of the ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Network Configuration
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
242 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Note
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Default
CO
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 243
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Network Type
Selects the network type of the port.
Default
51 US National ISDN 2
Value Range
0–56
(2 UK (Domestic), 5 Netherlands, 6 SwissNET2, 7 SwissNET3, 8 Euro ISDN (Standard), 14 France
(Domestic), 19 Finland, 20 Norway, 27 Australia, 51 US National ISDN 2)
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
244 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
Network Numbering Plan
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 245
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Note
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Default
CO
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
246 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Feature Manual References
None
Trunk Property
Selects the CO line property of the port.
Default
Public
Value Range
Public: Public network
VPN: Virtual Private Network
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Calling Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private
Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing CO line calls routed through public and private networks.
Default
Public: Unknown
Private: Private
Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 247
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Selects the type of number that applies to outgoing CO line calls routed through public or private networks.
Default
Unknown
Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Called Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private
Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming CO line calls routed through public and private networks.
Default
Public: Unknown
Private: Private
Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Selects the type of number that applies to incoming CO line calls routed through public and private networks.
Default
Unknown
248 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Supplementary Service
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Document Version 2008-09
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
PC Programming Manual 249
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Note
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Default
CO
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
250 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911
Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used.
The available services depend on the setting of Port Type on this screen.
When using the Centralized VM feature, set CF (Rerouting) to "No".
Default
CLIR, E911: Yes
Other services: No
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
13.1.21 Private Network Features—QSIG—CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber)
13.1.22 Private Network Features—QSIG—CF (Call Forwarding)
13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)
13.1.24 Private Network Features—QSIG—CT (Call Transfer)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 251
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection
Command
Commands for the PRI ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Feature Manual References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of repair.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Feature Manual References
None
252 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
The properties of the T1 card can be specified.
Line Coding
Selects the line coding type of T1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) used.
Default
B8ZS
Value Range
B8ZS, AMI
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Frame Sequence
Selects the type of frame sequence used for communications.
Default
ESF
Value Range
D4, ESF
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ESF Frame Sequence
set to ESF.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 253
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Default
C=A, D=B
Value Range
C=A, D=B; C=0, D=0; C=0, D=1; C=1, D=0; C=1, D=1
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
LIU Send Option
Selects the transmitting level (Transmit Pulse Amplitude) of LIU.
Default
Mode-1
Value Range
Mode-1–Mode-8
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
LIU Receive Option
Selects the receiving level (Receive Equalization) of LIU.
Default
Automatic
Value Range
Automatic, 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB
254 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
First Dial Timer (CO)
Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a CO line, before sending the dialed digits to the telephone company. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialed digits correctly.
Default
1.0 s
Value Range
0.5 ´ n (n=1–16) s
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
First Dial Timer (DID/TIE)
Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DID or TIE line, before sending the dialed digits to the telephone company or to another PBX. This allows the telephone company or the other PBX to have enough time to accept the dialed digits correctly.
Default
64 ms
Value Range
32 ´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 255
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Answer Detection Timer
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to recognize the answer signal. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialed digits correctly.
Default
32 ms
Value Range
32 ´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Wink Signal Width
Specifies the length of a wink signal.
Default
224 ms
Value Range
32 ´ n (n=4–9) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
256 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
DTMF Tone—DTMF Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialed digits correctly.
Default
112 ms
Value Range
64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–11) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
DTMF Tone—DTMF Transmit
Specifies the volume of the DTMF tone to be transmitted.
Default
-3 dB
Value Range
3-n (n=0–15) dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
DTMF Tone—DTMF Receive
Specifies the volume of the DTMF tone to be received.
Default
-26–0 dB
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 257
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Value Range n-42–0 (n=0–31) dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break
Specifies the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.
Default
60 %
Value Range
60 %, 67 %
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Type
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.
Default
Normal
Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
258 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialed digits correctly.
Default
830 ms
Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Pulse Dial—CO Feed Back Tone
Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing CO line calls, audible tones can be heard as the dialed number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialed.
Default
Yes
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 259
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Pulse Dial—Maximum BREAK Width
Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.
Default
112 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=9–20) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Pulse Dial—Minimum MAKE Width
Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.
Default
8 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=1–5) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Flash—Flash Signal Detection (OPX)
Enables the PBX to detect hookswitch flash signals from an SLT connected to an OPX.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
260 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Flash—Minimum BREAK Width (OPX)
Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal from an SLT connected to an OPX.
Default
200 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–63) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Flash—Flash Width (OPX)
Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal sent from an SLT connected to an OPX that the PBX can recognize as a hookswitch flash signal.
Default
800 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–191) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 261
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Feature Manual References
None
Flash—Flash Signal Detection (TIE)
Enables the PBX to detect a hookswitch flash signal sent from a TIE line.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Flash—Minimum BREAK Width (TIE)
Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal sent from a TIE line.
Default
200 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–63) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Flash—Flash Width (TIE)
Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal received from a TIE line that the PBX can recognize as a hookswitch flash signal.
262 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Default
800 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–191) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Caller ID—Caller ID Start Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series.
Default
*
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Information End Code
Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series.
Default
*
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 263
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID End Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.
Default
*
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
264 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Various settings can be programmed for each T1 channel.
To change the status of ports, click Command.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
CH
Indicates the channel number (reference only).
Default
Current channel number
Value Range
Channel number
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Connection
Indicates the channel status (reference only).
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 265
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The channel is in service.
OUS: The channel is out of service.
Fault: The channel is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
CO Dial Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to a CO line.
Default
DTMF
266 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Value Range
DTMF, Pulse
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.3 Dial Mode Selection
Channel Type
Selects the channel type.
Default
Undefined
Value Range
Undefined: Not assigned
GCOT: Ground Start Central Office
LCOT: Loop Start Central Office
DID: Direct Inward Dialing
TIE: TIE Line
OPX: Off Premise Extension
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.1 T1 Line Service
Trunk Property
Selects the CO line property of the TIE channel.
Default
Public
Value Range
Public: Use the DIL/DID method to distribute incoming CO line calls.
Document Version 2008-09
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
PC Programming Manual 267
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Private: Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs.
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
CPC Signal Detection (DID)—Outgoing, Incoming
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming CO line calls before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal is not detected.
This setting is only available when Channel Type on this screen is set to DID.
Default
160 ms
Value Range
None, 80 ´ n (n=2–75) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.22 CPC (Calling Party Control) Signal Detection
CPC Signal Detection (LCO/GCO)—Outgoing, Incoming
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming CO line calls before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal is not detected.
This setting is only available when Channel Type on this screen is set to GCOT or LCOT.
Default
400 ms
268 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Value Range
None, 8 ´ n (n=2–112) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.22 CPC (Calling Party Control) Signal Detection
DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the T1 channel.
Default
80 ms
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
CO Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the T1 channel.
Default
10 pulse/s
Value Range
10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Document Version 2008-09
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
PC Programming Manual 269
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.3 Dial Mode Selection
Wink Signal Time-Out
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a CO line. If a wink signal is not received before this timer expires, the CO line is released.
Default
1024 ms
Value Range
64 ´ n (n=1–128) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Start Signal Type
Selects the type of the start signal.
Default
Wink
Value Range
Immediate: Sends the dialed digits to the CO line when the First Dial Timer expires.
Wink: Sends the dialed digits to the CO line when the wink signal is received.
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
270 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Sending Caller ID to TIE
Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when the channel type is TIE.
Default
No
Value Range
Yes, No
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Receiving Caller ID from TIE
Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when the channel type is TIE.
Default
Yes
Value Range
Yes, No
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Ringback Tone to Outside Caller
Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.
This setting is only available when Channel Type on this screen is set to DID.
Default
Enable
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 271
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Dial Tone to Extension
Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the tone.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.
Default
1.5 s
Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
272 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.4 Pause Insertion
8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
16.1.5 Special Carrier Access Code
Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.
Default
608 ms
Value Range
None, 16 ´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access)
Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a CO line is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.
Default
1.5 s
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 273
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection
Command
Commands for the T1 channels can be programmed.
INS
Puts the channel in service.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Feature Manual References
None
OUS
Takes the channel out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of repair.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Feature Manual References
None
274 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
The properties of the Optional Base card can be specified.
To change the status of slots on the OPB card, click Command.
The properties of the built-in 2-channel SVM (Simplified Voice Message) and OGM (Outgoing Message)
features can also be specified on this screen. See 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property for details.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Sub-Slot
Indicates the sub-slot number (reference only).
Default
Current sub-slot number
Value Range
Sub-slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 275
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Feature Card Type
Indicates the type of option card that is installed or pre-installed in each sub-slot (reference only).
Note that only one ECHO16 card can be installed per OPB3 card.
Default
Current card type
Value Range
MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card
EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card
ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Installation Manual References
1.3.1 Optional Equipment
Programming Manual References
3.35 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup
Feature Manual References
None
Status
Indicates the status of the option card in each slot (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the card command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The card is in service.
OUS: The card is out of service.
Fault: The card has been removed from the sub-slot, or is not communicating with the PBX.
Pre-Install: There is no card in the sub-slot, but the card type is programmed for the sub-slot.
Idle: There is no card in the sub-slot, no programming of the card type for the sub-slot.
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
276 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Feature Manual References
None
Port Number
Indicates the port number of the mounted option card (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port Status
Indicates the port status of the mounted option card (reference only).
Default
Current port status
Value Range
INS: The card is in service.
OUS: The card is out of service.
Fault: The card is pulled out from the sub-slot, or is not communicating with the PBX.
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 277
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Input Signal Decision Time
Specifies the minimum duration of continuous input from the triggered sensor before the PBX recognizes the input and makes a sensor call.
Default
1024 ms
Value Range
32 ´ n (n=2–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
5.1.9 External Sensor
Input Signal Detection Reopening Time
Specifies the length of time after the sensor has been triggered during which any further input from the sensor will be ignored.
Default
10 s
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–255) s
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
5.1.9 External Sensor
SVM Feature
Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature. It is possible to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature, as an MSG card (OGM feature), or both.
Default
Disable
278 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—
Feature Manual References
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
MSG Feature
Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card as an MSG card. It is possible to use the ESVM card for the
SVM feature, as an MSG card (OGM feature), or both.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—
Feature Manual References
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 279
3.34 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
3.34 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card
Command
Commands for the service cards installed on the OPB card can be programmed.
INS
Puts the card in service.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.34 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
OUS
Takes the card out of service.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.34 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
280 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.34 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Pre-INS
Assigns the card type to a certain sub-slot (Pre-installation).
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card
EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card
ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.34 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Installation Manual References
1.3.1 Optional Equipment
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Delete
Assigns the card type to be deleted from the sub-slot.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.34 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 281
3.35 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup
3.35 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup
Option cards can be installed to and removed from the OPB3 cards installed in the PBX.
Click the right and left arrow buttons (">", "<") to add or remove option cards.
Option Card Type
Selects the type of option card to install to the OPB3 card.
Default
MSG4
Value Range
MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card
EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card
ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup
Installation Manual References
1.3.1 Optional Equipment
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Feature Manual References
None
Slot 1–Slot 3
Selects the slot on the OPB3 card to install or remove the option card for.
Default
Slot 1
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup
Programming Manual References
282 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.35 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Feature Manual References
None
Card Inserted
Displays the type of option card currently installed to each slot of the OPB3 card.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card
EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card
ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 283
3.36 [1-2] Portable Station
3.36 [1-2] Portable Station
Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed. A maximum of 64 PSs can be registered.
Information on 32 PSs is displayed at a time. To display other PSs, click the applicable tab.
PS Registration and De-registration
A PS must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and PS before it can be used. Programming instructions of the PBX are given below; programming instructions of the PS are found in the Installation
Manual.
It is possible to de-register the PS later.
Registration
Follow the steps below to register the PS.
1.
Click Registration.
A dialog box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension numbers are displayed on the left.
2.
Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
A screen will appear with information on the current PS extension number and index number for programming.
3.
Register the relevant PS.
For details, refer to the Installation Manual.
Registering 2.4 GHz PS ® 3.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX
Registering DECT 6.0 PS ® 3.10.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX
4.
Click Next.
• If the PS registration is still in progress, the dialog box will show "Waiting for portable station to register…". Click OK.
• If the registration is successful, the dialog box will show "Registration succeed".
If there are more PSs to be registered, click Continue to resume or Cancel to terminate the registration.
If not, click Close.
• Click Automatic response to register several PSs automatically.
Clicking this button means that all remaining PSs will be registered without having to click any other buttons.
Once a PS is successfully registered, the status of the PS will update to show "Registered".
De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register the PS.
1.
Click De-registration.
A dialog box will appear. Registered extension numbers are displayed on the left.
2.
Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialog box will appear.
3.
Click Confirm.
• If the de-registration is successful, the dialog box will show "De-registration succeed".
• If the de-registration is unsuccessful, the dialog box will show "De-registration Error". De-registration will be terminated.
4.
Click Close.
If the PS is successfully de-registered, the status of the PS will update to show "None".
284 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.36 [1-2] Portable Station
Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the PS when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful or de-registration has been performed only on the PS.
1.
Click Forced De-registration. A dialog box will appear. Registered extension numbers are displayed on the left.
2.
Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next.
A dialog box will appear.
3.
Click OK.
A dialog box will appear.
4.
Click Confirm.
• If the de-registration is successful, the dialog box will show "Forced de-registration succeed".
5.
Click Close.
Once the PS is successfully de-registered, the status of the PS will update to show "None".
Personal Identification Number
Specifies the Personal Identification Number (PIN) of the PBX, used to avoid registering a PS to the wrong
PBX.
Note that the same PIN should be entered at the PS, before the PS is registered to the PBX.
Default
1234
Value Range
4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Installation Manual References
3.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX
3.10.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.26 PS Connection
Index
Indicates the PS number (reference only).
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
1–64
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 285
3.36 [1-2] Portable Station
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.26 PS Connection
Extension No.
Specifies the extension number of the PS.
In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, the PS can be used as a sub telephone with a wired main telephone (PT/SLT), and two of them will share one extension number of the main telephone. However, note that the PS extension number specified here will not be altered by the extension number of the main telephone even if the PS is in
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.26 PS Connection
20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
286 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name
Feature Manual References
13.1.26 PS Connection
Status
Indicates whether a certain PS is registered (reference only).
Default
None
Value Range
None, Registered
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.26 PS Connection
3.36 [1-2] Portable Station
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 287
3.37 [1-3] Option
3.37 [1-3] Option
System options can be programmed.
It is possible to clear the master CS information (Master CS Port and Radio System ID) by following the procedure below in batch mode:
1.
Click Clear Master CS.
2.
Click Yes. To abort the procedure, click No.
If the system data is downloaded to the PBX after the master CS information has been cleared, it is necessary to register all PSs again in the interactive mode. Master CS information will be assigned automatically when a CS is connected to the PBX. Without the Radio System ID, PSs cannot be registered.
System Wireless—System ID
Indicates the radio system ID used to register a PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
New Card Installation—Card Status for any Card
Selects the initial status of cards after installation.
Default
In Service
Value Range
In Service, Out of Service
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
288 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.37 [1-3] Option
Feature Manual References
None
New Card Installation—Automatic Extension Number Set for Extension Card
Selects whether extension numbers are assigned to extension ports automatically or manually.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card
Specifies whether a PRI23 card is automatically set to ISDN Standard mode or T1-LCOT mode when it is installed for the first time.
Default
ISDN Standard mode
Value Range
ISDN Standard mode: The CCBS, CF, CT, and Centralized VM features are supported. DIL and DID call distribution are available for the D channel.
T1-LCOT mode: DIL and DID call distribution are available for all 23B channels. The CCBS, CF, CT, and
Centralized VM features are not available in this mode.
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.16 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail
4.1.7 DIL (Direct In Line)
4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 289
3.37 [1-3] Option
13.1.22 Private Network Features—QSIG—CF (Call Forwarding)
13.1.24 Private Network Features—QSIG—CT (Call Transfer)
13.1.21 Private Network Features—QSIG—CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber)
290 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
3.38 [1-4] Clock Priority
3.38 [1-4] Clock Priority
Slot Number
Selects and prioritizes slot numbers for the PRI and T1 cards that are used to forward a clock pulse from an external source to the PBX.
Obtain the master clock time from the outside line that the telephone company provides.
To change Clock Priority, follow the steps below:
1.
Assign a Clock Priority to each PRI and/or T1 card.
2.
Set the status of the present clock source card to "OUS", then "INS".
Note
If multiple PBXs are used to establish a private network (TIE line service, QSIG network, etc.) without being connected through the telephone company, assign only one PBX as the clock source on the network. That
PBX should have a card connected to a telephone company line selected as its clock source. All other
PBXs should have cards connected to the network selected as the clock source. This enables all PBXs on the network to synchronize their timing.
Default
None
Value Range
None, PRI23, T1
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Section 11 [9] Private Network
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 291
3.38 [1-4] Clock Priority
292 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Section 4
[2] System
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 293
4.1 [2-1-1] Date & Time—Date & Time Settings
4.1 [2-1-1] Date & Time—Date & Time Settings
The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display of extensions
(e.g., PT, PS).
This option is only available in Interactive mode.
Date & Time
Indicates the current date and time. Values can be entered by clicking the parameter you want to change and typing the new value, or by clicking the up/down arrows beside the date and time.
Default
Current date and time
Value Range
Year: 2000–2099
Month: 01–12
Day: 01–31
Hour: 00–23
Minute: 00–59
Second: 00–59
Maintenance Console Location
4.1 [2-1-1] Date & Time—Date & Time Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
294 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Automatic clock adjustment and Summer time (daylight saving time) settings of the PBX can be programmed.
Automatic clock adjustment can be performed using one of two methods, ISDN & Caller ID or SNTP (Simple
Network Time Protocol).
To set Summer time, click 4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving.
Automatic Time Adjustment
Enables the PBX to automatically adjust its clock every day according to the time information provided by the network.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, ISDN & Caller ID (FSK), SNTP
Maintenance Console Location
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.7 Automatic Time Adjustment
SNTP—SNTP Server—IP Address
Specifies the IP address of an SNTP server.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.7 Automatic Time Adjustment
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 295
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
SNTP—SNTP Server—Port Number
Specifies the port number used for communication with an SNTP server.
Default
123
Value Range
1–65535
Maintenance Console Location
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.7 Automatic Time Adjustment
SNTP—Time Zone—Time Zone
Specifies your local UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) time zone using the up and down arrows.
Default
+0:00
Value Range
-14:00–+14:00
Maintenance Console Location
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.7 Automatic Time Adjustment
SNTP—Time Zone—Time Zone for PC
Indicates the UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) time zone of the PC (reference only).
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
-14:00–+14:00
296 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Maintenance Console Location
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.7 Automatic Time Adjustment
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 297
4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving
4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—
Daylight Saving
Summer time can be programmed. Summer time sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start date, and one hour back at 2:00 AM on the end date. The start and end dates of a maximum of 20 different summer times can be programmed.
Setting
Enables Summer time.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Feature Manual References
1.1.7 Automatic Time Adjustment
Start Date—Year, Month, Day
Specifies the start date of daylight savings time.
Default
Year: 2008 (For Daylight Saving Time number 1. The year advances by one for the subsequent Daylight Saving
Times.)
Month: 3
Day: Day of the second Sunday of the month
Value Range
Year: 2000–2099
Month: 1–12
Day: 1–31
Maintenance Console Location
4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
298 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving
Feature Manual References
1.1.7 Automatic Time Adjustment
End Date—Year, Month, Day
Specifies the end date of daylight savings time.
Default
Year: 2008 (For Daylight Saving Time number 1. The year advances by one for the subsequent Daylight Saving
Times.)
Month: 11
Day: Day of the first Sunday of the month
Value Range
Year: 2000–2099
Month: 1–12
Day: 1–31
Maintenance Console Location
4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Feature Manual References
1.1.7 Automatic Time Adjustment
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 299
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Settings related to the PBX operator and audio sources can be specified.
PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the extension number or floating extension number of incoming call distribution group to be designated as the PBX operator in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). To select an extension number,
click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Default
101
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
12.1.5 Operator Features
BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM
Selects the audio source of BGM.
Default
Internal BGM 1
Value Range
External BGM, Internal BGM 1, Internal BGM 2
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
11.1.4 Music on Hold
2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)
300 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold
Selects the audio source for Music on Hold.
Default
BGM
Value Range
Tone, BGM
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
11.1.4 Music on Hold
BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on Transfer
Selects the audio source for Music for Transfer (either the same music source chosen for the Music on Hold, or ringback tone).
Default
Same as Music on Hold
Value Range
Same as Music on Hold, Ringback Tone
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.10 Call Transfer
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 301
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Various system timers and counters can be programmed.
Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter
Specifies the number of times Automatic Redial is attempted before being canceled.
Default
0
Value Range
0-15
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer an Automatic Redial attempt. This is the length of time that the called party’s extension will ring for each attempt.
Default
30 s
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–30) s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
302 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Automatic Redial—Analog CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer
Specifies the length of time before the PBX stops muting the caller’s voice and cancels busy tone detection when Automatic Redial to analog CO line is performed.
Default
8 s
Value Range
0–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
Specifies the length of time between going off-hook and the start of automatic dialing when the Hot Line feature is set.
Default
1 s
Value Range
0–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
8.1.6 Hot Line
Dial—Extension First Digit
Specifies the length of time after going off-hook within which the first digit of a feature number or destination must be dialed before a reorder tone is heard.
Default
10 s
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 303
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.5 Automatic Extension Release
Dial—Extension Inter-digit
Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits must be dialed before the PBX sends a reorder tone.
Default
10 s
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.5 Automatic Extension Release
Dial—Analog CO First Digit
Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a telephone number must be sent to an analog CO line. If no digit is sent before this time expires, the PBX recognizes end of dialing and stops muting the caller’s voice over the analog CO line.
Default
10 s
Value Range
1–15 s
304 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Dial—Analog CO Inter-digit
Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a telephone number must be sent to an analog
CO line. If no digit is sent before this time expires, the PBX recognizes end of dialing and stops muting the caller’s voice over the analog CO line.
Default
5 s
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Dial—Analog CO Call Duration Start
Specifies the length of time between the end of dialing and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing analog
CO line calls.
Default
0 s
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 305
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the length of time until an unanswered CO line call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode.
Note that this setting is only valid for extensions whose
Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch,
Default
40 s
Value Range
1–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept No Answer Time—
Feature Manual References
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
Recall—Hold Recall
Specifies the length of time until the holding extension receives a Hold Recall ring or alarm tone when a held call remains unretrieved.
Default
60 s
Value Range
0 (disable the Hold Recall)–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
306 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Feature Manual References
3.1.4 Call Hold
Recall—Transfer Recall
Specifies the length of time that a transferred call waits to be answered, before being redirected to the Transfer
Recall destination assigned to the original transferring extension.
Default
60 s
Value Range
1–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.10 Call Transfer
Recall—Call Park Recall
Specifies the length of time that a parked call waits to be retrieved, before the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension that parked the call hears a Call Park Recall ring.
Default
60 s
Value Range
1–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.7 Call Park
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 307
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Recall—Disconnect after Recall
Specifies the length of time after an extension with a CO line call on hold receives a Hold Recall tone that the held call is disconnected.
Default
30 min
Value Range
1–30 min
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.4 Call Hold
Tone Length—Busy Tone / DND Tone
Specifies the length of time that a busy/DND tone is heard when a call is made to an extension in busy status or DND mode. A reorder tone will be sent when this timer expires. (For a call through DISA, the call will be disconnected when this timer expires.)
Default
10 s
Value Range
0 (continuous)–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)
Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset
Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard when using a PT handset. The PT will return to idle status when this timer expires.
308 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Default
10 s
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.5 Automatic Extension Release
Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free
Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard from the built-in speaker of a PT in hands-free mode.
The PT will return to idle status when this timer expires. This setting is applied to PSs as well as PTs.
Default
3 s
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.5 Automatic Extension Release
8.1.2 Hands-free Operation
DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
DISA—Delayed Answer Timer
Specifies the length of time that the caller hears a ringback tone before hearing an OGM.
Default
5 s
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 309
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Value Range
0–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after answering
Specifies the length of time until the caller hears an OGM after reaching the DISA line.
Default
1.8 s
Value Range
0.0–12.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer
Specifies the length of time after the OGM finishes playing in which the caller must begin dialing before the call is redirected to the operator.
Default
10 s
Value Range
0–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
310 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
8.6 [6-6] Tenant— Operator (Extension Number)
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA
Specifies the length of time in which the caller must dial the second digit before the DISA AA Service activates.
Default
2 s
Value Range
0–5 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the length of time until an unanswered DISA call is intercepted and redirected to the intercept routing destination after the original destination receives the call in each time mode.
Default
40 s
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 311
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept
Specifies the length of time that an intercepted DISA call rings at the intercept routing destination before being disconnected.
Default
60 s
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter
Specifies the number of times that the caller can prolong a CO-to-CO line call on a DISA line. (Selecting "0" enables the caller to prolong the CO-to-CO line call without restriction.)
Default
10
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
312 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time
Specifies the length of time that a CO-to-CO line call on a DISA line is prolonged each time that the caller prolongs the call. (Selecting "0" prevents the caller from prolonging the CO-to-CO line call.)
Default
3 min
Value Range
0–7 min
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message
Specifies the length of time that a progress tone is sent to the manager extension before recording an OGM.
Default
5 s
Value Range
0–7 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
DISA—Reorder Tone Duration
Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is sent to the caller before the call is disconnected.
Default
10 s
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 313
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
Doorphone—Call Ring Duration
Specifies the length of time that a call from a doorphone rings until the call is canceled when there is no answer.
Default
30 s
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–15) s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
4.1.12 Doorphone Call
Doorphone—Call Duration
Specifies the length of time until an answered doorphone call is disconnected.
Default
60 s
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=0–30) s
Maintenance Console Location
314 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
4.1.12 Doorphone Call
Doorphone—Open Duration
Specifies the length of time that a door stays unlocked after being opened from an extension.
Default
5 s
Value Range
2–7 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
4.1.11 Door Open
Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter
Specifies the number of times that an alarm is repeated.
Default
3
Value Range
1–15
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.4 Timed Reminder
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 315
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Timed Reminder—Interval Time
Specifies the length of time between the repeated alarms.
Default
30 s
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–120) s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.4 Timed Reminder
Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration
Specifies the length of time that an alarm rings.
Default
30 s
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–30) s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.4 Timed Reminder
Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer
Specifies the length of time until the conference originator receives an Unattended Conference Recall tone.
Default
10 min
Value Range
0–60 min
316 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.18 Conference
Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer
Specifies the length of time until the parties involved in an Unattended Conference receive a warning tone after the conference originator receives the Unattended Conference Recall tone but does not return to the conference.
Default
30 s
Value Range
0–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.18 Conference
Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer
Specifies the length of time until an Unattended Conference is disconnected after the parties involved in the conference receive a warning tone but the conference originator does not return to the conference.
Default
15 s
Value Range
0–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 317
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.18 Conference
Miscellaneous
Caller ID—Waiting to receive
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive Caller ID from an analog CO line. If the Caller ID is received through an analog CO line card on which no Caller ID card is mounted or through a port to which
Caller ID Detection is disabled, this timer is not applicable.
Default
5 s
Value Range
0–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display
Specifies the length of time that a Caller ID number, with the Call Waiting tone offered by an analog line from the telephone company, is shown on the display. The Caller ID number flashes on the display for five seconds, followed by a 10-second pause, then flashes again for five seconds.
Default
30 s
Value Range
0–250 s
Maintenance Console Location
318 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES
3.1.12 Call Waiting Tone
Extension PIN—Lock Counter
Specifies the number of successive incorrect PIN entries allowed before the extension PIN is locked. A locked extension PIN can not be used until reset from the extension assigned as manager. (Specifying "None" disables this counter.)
Default
None
Value Range
None, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
20.1.1 Walking COS
19.1.1 Verification Code Entry
5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)
External Sensor—Ring Duration
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer before canceling a sensor call.
Default
30 s
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–15) s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 319
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Feature Manual References
5.1.9 External Sensor
Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DID
Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a DID number from a public network. The call will be redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires.
Default
10 s
Value Range
0–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—TIE
Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a dialed number from a TIE line. The call will be redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires.
Default
10 s
Value Range
3–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
320 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode
Specifies the length of time that the current information remains on the display after the extension returns to idle status.
Default
5 s
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Voice Mail (Caller from VM to CO)—On-hook Wait Time
Specifies the length of time from when the VPS seizes a CO line (for example, to transfer a call) until the VPS goes on hook. If the time specified here is too short, the VPS will be unable to dial the number and make a connection.
Default
10 s
Value Range
1–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
During Conversation—DTMF Signal Length
Specifies the length of time that a DTMF signal is sent when a number is dialed from a PT or PS during a conversation.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 321
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Default
160 ms
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms, 240 ms, 320 ms
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
During Conversation—DTMF Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of time between DTMF signals when numbers are dialed in succession from a PT or PS during a conversation.
Default
112 ms
Value Range
64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–15) ms
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
During Conversation—Pause Signal Time
Specifies the length of the pause inserted when the PAUSE button is pressed during a conversation.
Default
1.5 s
Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s
322 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.4 Pause Insertion
System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer
When the destination of an incoming call is a PS, specifies the length of time the PBX searches for the PS before setting its status to Out of Range.
If "0" is assigned, the timer is controlled by the cell station.
Default
0 s
Value Range
0 s, 4 s, 8 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
System Wireless—Out of Range Registration
Feature Manual References
13.1.19 Private Network Features—PS Roaming by Network ICD Group
SVM—Recording Time
Specifies the maximum length of a message recorded by the SVM feature.
Default
120 s
Value Range
1–600 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 323
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Manual References
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
SVM—Dial Tone Continuous Time
Specifies the length of time that dial tone 3 is heard after all messages stored by the SVM feature for an extension are finished playing.
Default
5 s
Value Range
1–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Manual References
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
324 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.6 [2-4] Week Table
4.6 [2-4] Week Table
A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time of day.
The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching mode from the
Time Service Switching Mode option.
Time Table numbers correspond to tenant numbers (for example, Tenant 1 uses Time Table 1). Select the desired Time Table from the Time Table No. list.
When in Automatic Switching mode, the time modes of the tenant are switched as programmed in the corresponding Time Table. Manual switching is possible only from an authorized extension (determined by
COS).
• To adjust the currently displayed Time Table, click and drag the divisions between two time periods.
• To program the time blocks of the currently displayed Time Table, including adding or deleting time blocks, click Time Setting.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 325
4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
The start times of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Time
Table, as well as the start and end times of up to 3 break periods.
1. Day/Lunch/Night—Day1 Start, Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start—Setting
Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.
Default
Day 1 Start, Night Start: Enable
Lunch Start, Day 2 Start: Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.3 Tenant Service
17.1.5 Time Service
1. Day/Lunch/Night—Day1 Start, Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start—Hour,
Minute
Specifies the start time for each time block. Times can only be set when
Start, Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start—Setting is set to Enable.
Default
Day1: 9:00
Lunch: 12:00
Day2: 13:00
Night: 17:00
Value Range
00:00–23:59
Maintenance Console Location
4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
326 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Feature Manual References
17.1.3 Tenant Service
17.1.5 Time Service
2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Setting
Enables the setting of the start time for each break period.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.3 Tenant Service
17.1.5 Time Service
2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Hour, Minute
Specifies the start time for each break period. Times can only be set when
Default
00:00
Value Range
00:00–23:59
Maintenance Console Location
4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.3 Tenant Service
17.1.5 Time Service
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 327
4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
2. Break—Break 1–3 End—Hour, Minute
Specifies the start time for each break period. Times can only be set when 2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—
Default
00:00
Value Range
00:01–23:59
Maintenance Console Location
4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.3 Tenant Service
17.1.5 Time Service
328 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table
4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table
A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select the desired time mode from the Holiday Mode list.
The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed.
Holiday Table—Setting
Enables the setting of the holiday.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Holiday Table—Start Date—Month
Specifies the month of the holiday start date.
Default
1
Value Range
1–12
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 329
4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table
Holiday Table—Start Date—Day
Specifies the day of the holiday start date.
Default
1
Value Range
1–31
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Holiday Table—End Date—Month
Specifies the month of the holiday end date.
Default
1
Value Range
1–12
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Holiday Table—End Date—Day
Specifies the day of the holiday end date.
Default
1
Value Range
1–31
330 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 331
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers and numbers to access other PBXs in a network can be programmed here.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Manual.
Extension
The leading numbers and the number of additional digits of the extension numbers for a maximum of 64 different extension numbering schemes can be programmed.
Leading Number
Specifies the leading number of extension numbers and floating extension numbers.
Default
Extension Numbering Scheme 01: 1
Extension Numbering Scheme 02: 2
Extension Numbering Scheme 03: 3
Extension Numbering Scheme 04: 4
Extension Numbering Scheme 21: 5
Extension Numbering Scheme 22: 6
Extension Numbering Scheme 05–20, 23–64: Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
No. of Additional Digits
Specifies the number of additional digits following the leading number.
Default
XX
332 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Value Range
None: 0 digit
X: 1 digit
XX: 2 digits
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
Features
Feature numbers to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a dial tone.
Operator Call
Specifies the feature number used to call the operator.
Default
0
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
12.1.5 Operator Features
Idle Line Access (Local Access)
Specifies the feature number used to make a CO line call by Idle Line Access (selects an idle CO line automatically).
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 333
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Default
9
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
Feature Manual References
3.1.16 CO Line Access
Trunk Group Access
Specifies the feature number used to make a CO line call using an idle CO line from a certain trunk group.
Default
8
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
3.1.16 CO Line Access
TIE Line Access
Specifies the feature number used to make a TIE line call.
Default
7
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
334 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Redial
Specifies the feature number used to redial the last number dialed.
Default
#
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
System Speed Dialing / Personal Speed Dialing
Specifies the feature number used to make a call using a System/Personal Speed Dialing number.
Default
**
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 335
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Manual References
16.1.6 Speed Dialing, Personal
16.1.7 Speed Dialing, System
Personal Speed Dialing - Programming
Specifies the feature number used to program Personal Speed Dialing numbers at an extension.
Default
*30
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.6 Speed Dialing, Personal
Doorphone Call
Specifies the feature number used to make a call to a doorphone.
Default
*31
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
4.1.12 Doorphone Call
Group Paging
Specifies the feature number used to page a certain paging group.
336 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Default
*33
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
External BGM On / Off
Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to turn on or off the external BGM.
Default
*35
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager—
Feature Manual References
2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)
OGM Record / Clear / Playback
Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to record, clear, or play back a certain
OGM.
Default
*36
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 337
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager—
Feature Manual References
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
Single CO Line Access
Specifies the feature number used to make a CO line call using a certain CO line.
Default
*37
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
3.1.16 CO Line Access
Parallel Telephone (Ring) Mode Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel an SLT connected in parallel with a DPT to ring when receiving an incoming call.
Default
*39
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
338 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Manual References
13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone
Group Call Pickup
Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain call pickup group.
Default
*40
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
3.1.8 Call Pickup
Directed Call Pickup
Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain extension.
Default
*41
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—
Feature Manual References
3.1.8 Call Pickup
TAFAS Answer
Specifies the feature number used to answer a CO line call notified through an external pager.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 339
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Default
*42
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
17.1.2 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station)
Group Paging Answer
Specifies the feature number used to answer a page to a paging group.
Default
*43
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
Automatic Callback Busy Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to cancel Automatic Callback Busy.
Default
*46
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
340 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code
Specifies the feature number used to change the COS of an extension temporarily, and also change the feature settings (for example, FWD, DND) of an extension from another extension or through DISA.
Default
*47
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions—
Remote Operation by Other Extension
Feature Manual References
20.1.1 Walking COS
19.1.1 Verification Code Entry
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Wireless XDP Parallel mode.
Default
*48
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 341
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Accept Wireless XDP
Feature Manual References
20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Account Code Entry
Specifies the feature number used to enter an Account Code.
Default
*49
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.2 Account Code Entry
Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve
Specifies the feature number used to hold a call or retrieve a call on hold from the holding extension.
Default
*50
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.4 Call Hold
342 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number
Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held call from a different extension by specifying a holding extension number.
Default
*51
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.4 Call Hold
Call Park / Call Park Retrieve
Specifies the feature number used to hold a call in a parking zone or retrieve a call held in a parking zone.
Default
*52
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.7 Call Park
Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Held CO Line Number
Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held CO line call from a different extension by specifying the held CO line number.
Default
*53
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 343
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.4 Call Hold
Door Open
Specifies the feature number used to open a door.
Default
*55
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
4.1.11 Door Open
External Relay Access
Specifies the feature number used to activate a relay.
Default
*56
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
344 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
5.1.8 External Relay
External Feature Access
Specifies the feature number used to access the features of a host PBX or the telephone company.
Default
*60
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access)
COLR Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel COLR, which suppresses the presentation of the called party’s number to the caller.
Default
*7*0
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 345
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)
CLIR Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel CLIR, which suppresses the presentation of the caller’s number to the called party.
Default
*7*1
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)
Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension
Specifies the feature number used to send either the CLIP number of the CO line in use (subscriber’s number) or the extension to the network.
Default
*7*2
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting—
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—ISDN CLIP—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—ISDN CLIP—
346 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
MCID
Specifies the feature number used to ask the telephone company to trace a malicious call. This feature can be used during a call or while hearing a reorder tone after the caller hangs up.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Message Waiting, or call back the caller.
Default
*70
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
11.1.3 Message Waiting
FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming CO line and intercom calls.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 347
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Default
*710
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming CO line calls.
Default
*711
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming intercom calls.
Default
*712
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
348 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD No Answer Timer Set
Specifies the feature number used to set the length of time before a call is forwarded.
Default
*713
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming CO line and intercom calls to an incoming call distribution group.
Default
*714
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 349
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming CO line calls to an incoming call distribution group.
Default
*715
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming intercom calls to an incoming call distribution group.
Default
*716
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
350 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Call Pickup Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions from picking up calls to your extension).
Default
*720
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.8 Call Pickup
Paging Deny Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Paging Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions from paging your extension).
Default
*721
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
Walking Extension
Specifies the feature number used to use the same extension settings at a new extension.
Default
*727
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 351
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
20.1.2 Walking Extension
Data Line Security Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Data Line Security (i.e., preventing signals from other extensions during data transmission).
Default
*730
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.1 Data Line Security
Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call
Specifies the feature number used to set or change the method of receiving a Call Waiting notification from an extension.
Default
*731
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
352 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES
Automatic Call Waiting
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Call Waiting notification from a CO line, doorphone, or a call via an incoming call distribution group.
Default
*732
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES
Executive Override Deny Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Executive Busy Override (i.e., preventing other extensions from joining your conversation).
Default
*733
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Executive Busy Override
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 353
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Executive Busy Override Deny
Feature Manual References
5.1.3 Executive Busy Override
Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off
Specifies the feature number used to enter or leave Not Ready mode.
Default
*735
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Log-in / Log-out
Specifies the feature number used to join or leave an incoming call distribution group.
Default
*736
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
354 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Incoming Call Queue Monitor
Specifies the feature number, available only for extensions assigned as a supervisor, used to monitor the status of an incoming call distribution group with the extension display.
Default
*739
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous—
Feature Manual References
9.1.7 ICD Group Features—Supervisory
Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Program Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set/cancel the Hot Line feature, or program the number to be automatically dialed.
Default
*740
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
Feature Manual References
8.1.6 Hot Line
Absent Message Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the display of an Absent Message.
Default
*750
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 355
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.1 Absent Message
BGM Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the BGM heard through the telephone speaker while on-hook.
Default
*751
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)
Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call)
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder remotely (Wake-up Call).
Default
*76*
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
356 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.4 Timed Reminder
Timed Reminder Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder.
Default
*760
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.4 Timed Reminder
Printing Message
Specifies the feature number used to select a Printing Message to be output on SMDR.
Default
*761
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8
Feature Manual References
13.1.13 Printing Message
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 357
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to lock or unlock an extension to make certain CO line calls and change the forwarding destination, using the Extension Dial Lock feature.
Default
*77
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock
Time Service (Day / Lunch / Break / Night) Switch
Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to change the time mode manually.
Default
*780
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager—
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager—
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Remote Extension Dial Lock Off
Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to unlock other extensions using the
Extension Dial Lock feature.
Default
*782
358 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager—
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock
Remote Extension Dial Lock On
Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to lock other extensions using the
Extension Dial Lock feature.
Default
*783
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager—
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock
Extension Feature Clear
Specifies the feature number used to reset certain features of an extension to the default values.
Default
*790
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 359
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.5 Extension Feature Clear
Extension PIN Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set a PIN for an extension.
Default
*799
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)
Dial Information (CTI)
Specifies the feature number used to send dial information to the CTI feature instead of the PBX.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
360 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Centralized BLF Monitor Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to cancel monitoring of an extension using an NDSS button.
Default
*784
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
Simplified Voice Message Access
Specifies the feature number used to access the SVM feature to record, listen to and delete messages.
Default
*38
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Manual References
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Other PBX Extension
Other PBX extension numbers can be used to easily call extensions connected to PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network. The leading numbers of all PBXs in the network that will be called should be entered in this table. A maximum of 16 leading numbers can be programmed.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 361
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Dial
Specifies the leading extension number of the other PBX.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Leading Number
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
362 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Quick Dialing numbers are used to call extensions or outside parties, or access certain features without having to dial their full numbers. It is possible to register Quick Dialing numbers that overlap with other registered numbers (refer to "Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public CO Lines" in the Feature Manual).
A maximum of 80 Quick Dialing numbers can be programmed in Basic Memory, and a maximum of 4000 Quick
Dialing numbers can be programmed in Expansion. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Manual.
Use quick dial for rerouting to public CO when TIE line does not work
Specifies whether to check if the quick dial numbering plan is compatible (does not overlap) with the main numbering plan.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: Checks whether the quick dial numbering plan is compatible with the main numbering plan.
Enable: Does not check whether the quick dial numbering plan is compatible with the main numbering plan.
Maintenance Console Location
4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.25 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
14.1.1 Quick Dialing
Dial
Specifies the Quick Dialing number.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Basic Memory: Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Expand 1–4000: Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 363
4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.25 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
14.1.1 Quick Dialing
Phone Number
Specifies the number to be dialed when the corresponding Quick Dialing number is used.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.25 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
14.1.1 Quick Dialing
364 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature number.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Manual.
BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting, or call an extension in DND mode.
Default
1
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—
Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2—
Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
Feature Manual References
3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES
3.1.12 Call Waiting Tone
4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)
12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)
20.1.4 Whisper OHCA
Executive Busy Override
Specifies the feature number used to interrupt an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.
Default
3
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Executive Busy Override
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 365
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—
Feature Manual References
5.1.3 Executive Busy Override
Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice
Specifies the feature number used to allow a caller to change the called extension’s preset call receiving method to ring tone or voice.
Default
*
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.13 Intercom Call
Message Waiting Set
Specifies the feature number used to leave a Message Waiting notification.
Default
4
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
11.1.3 Message Waiting
366 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Call Monitor
Specifies the feature number used to listen to a busy extension’s conversation.
Default
5
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—
Feature Manual References
3.1.6 Call Monitor
Automatic Callback Busy
Specifies the feature number used to reserve a busy line and receive callback ringing when the line becomes idle.
Default
6
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting, or call an
extension in DND mode. This is the same setting as BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override on
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 367
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature this screen, and can be used to provide two methods of activating the specified features. This can be useful, for example, if users prefer to use a separate feature number to activate DND Override.
Default
2
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—
Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2—
Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
Feature Manual References
3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES
3.1.12 Call Waiting Tone
4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)
12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)
20.1.4 Whisper OHCA
368 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class of
Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS. A maximum of 64 COS levels can be programmed.
TRS
Restrictions to features related to making CO line calls can be programmed for each COS.
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the Toll Restriction (TRS) level for making CO line calls in each time mode.
Default
COS No.1: 1
COS No.2: 2
COS No.3: 3
COS No.4: 4
COS No.5: 5
COS No.6: 6
COS No.7: 7
COS No.8–64: 1
Value Range
1: Allows all CO line calls
2–6: Restricts CO line calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables
7: Restricts all CO line calls
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 369
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— COS
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
TRS Level on Extension Lock
Specifies the TRS level for making CO line calls when an extension is locked using the Extension Dial Lock feature.
Default
7
Value Range
1: Allows all CO line calls
2–6: Restricts CO line calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables
7: Restricts all CO line calls
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock
TRS Level for System Speed Dialing
Specifies the TRS level for making a CO line call using System Speed Dialing numbers, which overrides the
TRS set for the current time mode.
370 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Default
1
Value Range
1: Allows all CO line calls
2–6: Restricts CO line calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables
7: Restricts all CO line calls
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— TRS Override by System Speed Dialing
Feature Manual References
16.1.7 Speed Dialing, System
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
CO & SMDR
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit
Enables the extension-to-CO line call duration feature. The maximum call duration can be set using
Extension-CO Duration Time on 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 371
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2—
Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— COS
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
3.1.17 CO Line Call Limitation
Transfer to CO
Enables the transferring of calls to CO lines.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
3.1.10 Call Transfer
Call Forward to CO
Enables the forwarding of calls to CO lines.
Default
Disable
372 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Account Code Mode
Specifies whether the entry of an account code is optional or mandatory when making a CO line call.
Default
Option
Value Range
Option, Forced
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
1.1.2 Account Code Entry
Outgoing CO Call Printout (SMDR)
Enables the automatic recording of information about outgoing CO line calls on SMDR.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 373
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Extension Feature
The use of features related to extension operations can be programmed for each COS.
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
Executive Busy Override
Enables interrupting an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
374 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
5.1.3 Executive Busy Override
DND Override
Enables making a call to an extension in DND mode by entering the feature number.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)
OHCA / Whisper OHCA
Enables using OHCA/Whisper OHCA as a method of second call notification by entering the feature number.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 375
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)
20.1.4 Whisper OHCA
Call Monitor
Enables listening to a busy extension’s conversation.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
3.1.6 Call Monitor
Call Pickup by DSS
Enables using a DSS button to pick up a call to a specified extension.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
376 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.8 Call Pickup
Programming & Manager
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
Executive Busy Override Deny
Enables preventing other extensions from interrupting calls.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 377
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Group Forward Set
Enables setting call forwarding for calls to an incoming call distribution group.
Default
Enable-Group
Value Range
Disable: An extension cannot set call forwarding for any group.
Enable-All: An extension can set call forwarding for all groups.
Enable-Group: An extension can only set call forwarding for the group to which the extension belongs.
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Programming Mode Level
Specifies the level of authorization for performing PT programming.
Default
COS No.1-63: PROG Only
COS No.64: PROG **/*#
Value Range
Disable: A PT user cannot perform any programming.
PROG Only: A PT user can perform only personal programming.
PROG **/*#: A PT user can perform both personal and system programming.
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
13.1.30 PT Programming
378 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Manager
Specifies the authorization to use manager features.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
11.1.1 Manager Features
Time Service Switch
Enables manual switching of time modes.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
PDN/SDN
An SDN button allows a PT user to see the current status of the corresponding PDN extension, and to pick up or transfer calls to that extension easily. The settings here control how SDN buttons operate for extensions at each COS level.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 379
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
SDN Key Mode
Selects what happens when an extension user presses an SDN button while on hook.
Default
Enhanced DSS
Value Range
Enhanced DSS: The registered (owner) extension is called.
Standard SDN: A dial tone is heard.
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Making call by COS of SDN key’s owner
Selects whether an extension that uses an SDN button to make calls is given the COS of the SDN button’s registered (owner) extension.
This setting is only available when SDN Key Mode above is set to "Standard SDN".
Default
Disable
380 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN— COS Name
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
SDN Key Assignment by PT Program
Selects whether PT users can create SDN buttons on their own extensions using PT programming.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Optional Device & Other Extensions
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 381
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
Door Unlock
Enables using the door opener feature.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
4.1.11 Door Open
External Relay Access
Enables access to external relays.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
382 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Manual References
5.1.8 External Relay
Accept the Call from DISA
Enables reception of calls from DISA.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
Remote Operation by Other Extension
Allows the Walking COS feature to be used from a remote location (inside the PBX, or outside the PBX using
DISA).
Default
Allow
Value Range
Allow, Deny
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
20.1.1 Walking COS
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 383
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS
Allows Wireless XDP Parallel Mode to be set by a PS.
Default
Allow
Value Range
Allow, Deny
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
384 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.13 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
4.13 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making CO line calls, depending on the time mode
(day/lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list.
Outgoing Trunk Group 1–64
Specifies the available trunk groups.
Default
All Trunk groups: Non Block
Value Range
Block (blue), Non Block
Maintenance Console Location
4.13 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.16 CO Line Access
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 385
4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
Internal Call Block determines the restrictions placed on making intercom calls. The extensions, incoming call distribution groups, and doorphones belonging to a certain COS can be programmed to not receive intercom calls from those belonging to a certain COS.
COS Number of the Extension Which Receive the Call from Other Extension
1–64
Specifies the combinations of COS levels for which intercom calls are blocked.
Default
All extensions: Non Block
Value Range
Block (blue), Non Block
Maintenance Console Location
4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
9.1.14 Internal Call Block
386 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming CO line calls depending on the trunk group that the calls are received on. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming CO line calls.
Default
Single
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple
Maintenance Console Location
4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Feature Manual References
15.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 387
4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from
Doorphone
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming doorphone calls depending on the doorphone port that the calls originate from. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming doorphone calls.
Default
Triple
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, S-Double
Maintenance Console Location
4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Feature Manual References
15.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
4.1.12 Doorphone Call
388 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming intercom calls and ringing triggered by certain PBX features (Timed Reminder, Call Back, and Live Call Screening). A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
For more information on ring tone patterns, see "15.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection" in the Feature Manual.
Extension—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming intercom calls.
Default
Double
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Feature Manual References
None
Timed Reminder—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for Timed Reminder alarms.
Default
Triple
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Feature Manual References
17.1.4 Timed Reminder
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 389
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Call Back—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for callback ringing by Automatic Callback Busy.
Default
S-Double
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, S-Double
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Feature Manual References
1.1.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
Live Call Screening—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for LCS warning tones.
Default
Triple
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
External Sensor—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for calls from an external sensor.
Default
Triple
390 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Feature Manual References
5.1.9 External Sensor
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 391
4.18 [2-9] System Options
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Various system settings can be programmed.
Option 1
PT LCD—Date Display
Selects the order that the month and date are shown on the displays of extensions.
Default
Month-Date
Value Range
Date-Month, Month-Date
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
PT LCD—Time Display
Selects the time format shown on the displays of extensions. The time display format assigned here applies when setting the Timed Reminder feature.
Default
12H
Value Range
12H, 24H
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.4 Timed Reminder
392 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.18 [2-9] System Options
PT LCD—Password / PIN Display
Selects whether passwords and PINs (Personal Identification Number) are hidden or shown on the displays of extensions while being entered.
Default
Hide
Value Range
Hide, Display
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)
PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the FWD feature is activated.
Default
Flash
Value Range
On (Solid): Red on
Flash: Slow red flashing
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
10.1.1 LED Indication
PT Fwd / DND—DND LED
Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the DND feature is activated.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 393
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Default
On (Solid)
Value Range
On (Solid): Red on
Flash: Slow red flashing
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
10.1.1 LED Indication
PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle
Selects the function of the FWD/DND button (fixed button) when it is pressed in idle status. (A FWD/DND button customized on a flexible button is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch mode, and the mode cannot be changed.)
Default
FWD/DND Setting Mode
Value Range
FWD/DND Setting Mode: Enter programming mode for the FWD/DND setting.
FWD/DND Cycle Switch: Switch the FWD on/DND on/Off mode instead of entering the programming mode for the FWD/DND setting. (When there are separate FWD/DND settings for calls from CO lines and calls from extensions, mode switching cannot be performed.)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
PT Fwd / DND—Paging to DND Extension
Specifies whether extensions can receive paging when in DND mode.
394 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Default
Do Not Page
Value Range
Do Not Page, Page
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor for KX-T74xx/T76xx
Enables the use of Off-Hook Monitor with KX-T7400, KX-T7600, or KX-DT300 series telephones and IP-PTs.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable: The PT user’s voice is sent through the handsfree microphone. The other party’s voice is heard through the hands-free speaker.
Enable: The PT user’s voice is sent through the handset microphone. The other party’s voice is heard through both the hands-free speaker and the handset.
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
12.1.1 Off-hook Monitor
PT Operation—Privacy Release by SCO key
Selects the function of the S-CO button during a CO line call.
Default
Enable
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 395
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Value Range
Enable: Pressing the S-CO button activates the Privacy Release feature
Disable: Pressing the S-CO button switches the information shown on the PT display.
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.14 Privacy Release
PT Operation—JOG Dial Speed
Selects the speed at which items scroll on the display when the Jog Dial is used.
Default
Normal
Value Range
Normal, High Speed
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting
Specifies whether incoming call ringing can be turned off at individual extensions. If disabled, users cannot prevent incoming calls from ringing.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
396 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
15.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after
Specifies the number of times a PT in Hands-free Answerback mode will ring before a conversation is established automatically when it receives a call from a CO line.
Default
1 Ring
Value Range
No Ring, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
8.1.1 Hands-free Answerback
PT Operation—Automatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group key
Selects whether calls are disconnected or held when an INTERCOM, PDN, CO, or ICD Group button is pressed while having a conversation.
Default
Disconnect
Value Range
Disable (Disconnect), Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 397
4.18 [2-9] System Options
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
3.1.4 Call Hold
PT Operation—Hold Key Mode
Selects which extensions can retrieve a held call or a call that is transferred by Call Transfer without
Announcement feature.
Default
Hold
Value Range
Hold: Any extension can retrieve a held call.
Exclusive Hold: Only the holding extension can retrieve a held call.
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.4 Call Hold
Option 2
Extension Clear—Call Waiting
Specifies whether the Call Waiting setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.
Default
Clear
Value Range
Clear, Do not clear
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
398 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Feature Manual References
5.1.5 Extension Feature Clear
Extension Clear—Fwd/DND
Specifies whether the FWD/DND setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.
Default
Clear
Value Range
Clear, Do not clear
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.5 Extension Feature Clear
Extension Clear—Hot Line (Pickup Dial)
Specifies whether the Hot Line setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.
Default
Clear
Value Range
Clear, Do not clear
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.5 Extension Feature Clear
CODEC—System CODEC
Selects the CODEC type for DPTs and PSs.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 399
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Default
µ-Law
Value Range
A-Law, µ-Law
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
CODEC—Network CODEC
Selects the CODEC type for ISDN or T1 lines.
Default
µ-Law
Value Range
A-Law, µ-Law
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
End of Dial Plan—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode
Specifies whether to automatically send "#" as an end code when dialing to an ISDN line; if used as the end code, "#" will not be dialed out as part of a number even when the "#" key is pressed.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
400 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting—
Feature Manual References
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN)
Selects whether Automatic Redial to an ISDN line is performed when the called party does not answer within a preprogrammed time period.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters— Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration
Feature Manual References
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory
Specifies whether any digits dialed after the called party answers (for example, to access a specific extension within another company) are also saved as part of the redial number.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 401
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Feature Manual References
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
Redial—Call Log by Redial key
Enables display of the Outgoing Call Log on a DPT by pressing the REDIAL button while on hook.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call
Selects whether the time limit for extension-to-CO line calls applies to outgoing calls only or for both outgoing and incoming calls. COS determines the use of this feature, and the length of the time limit can be assigned on a trunk group basis.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—
Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
3.1.17 CO Line Call Limitation
402 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Option 3
Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 1. Confirmation Tone 1 is heard from a PT when it receives a call in voice-calling mode.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.12 Doorphone Call
3.1.19 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 2. Confirmation Tone 2 is heard from a PT when it receives a call in Hands-free Answerback mode, or paging.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.19 Confirmation Tone
8.1.1 Hands-free Answerback
13.1.1 Paging
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 403
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after Making Call / Call from
Doorphone
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-1. Confirmation Tone 3-1 is heard from an extension when, for example, it pages another extension, or from a doorphone when the doorphone button is pressed.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.19 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2 : Start Talking after Answering Call
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-2. Confirmation Tone 3-2 is heard from an extension when answering a call by, for example, the Call Pickup feature.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.19 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-1. Confirmation Tone 4-1 is heard from an extension when a new party joins a conference call.
404 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.18 Conference
3.1.19 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-2. Confirmation Tone 4-2 is heard from an extension when a party leaves a conference call.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.18 Conference
3.1.19 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 5. Confirmation Tone 5 is heard from an extension when it holds a call.
Default
Enable
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 405
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.19 Confirmation Tone
Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
Enables the PBX to send dial tones at different frequencies depending on the setting of the extension.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.4 Dial Tone
Dial Tone—Dial Tone for Extension
Selects the dial tone the PBX sends to extensions to inform about the features activated on them.
Default
Type A
Value Range
Type A, Type B
Maintenance Console Location
406 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.4 Dial Tone
Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS
Selects the dial tone the PBX (instead of the network) sends to the caller when a call is made using the ARS feature, or ISDN En Bloc dialing.
Default
Type A
Value Range
Type A, Type B
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
4.1.4 Dial Tone
Echo Cancel—Conference
Enables the use of the ECHO card for conference calls.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 407
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Feature Manual References
3.1.18 Conference
Echo Cancel—CO-to-CO
Enables the use of the ECHO card for CO-to-CO line calls.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Echo Cancel—Extension to Analog Line
Enables the use of the ECHO card for extension-to-analog CO line calls.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Echo Cancel—Extension to Digital Line
Enables the use of the ECHO card for extension-to-ISDN/T1 line calls.
If set to "Enable", the echo canceller card is used for extension-to-ISDN/T1 line calls.
408 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.18 [2-9] System Options
If set to "Disable", the echo canceller card is not used for extension-to-ISDN/T1 line calls.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Option 4
DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call
Enables the use of a DSS button to pick up an incoming call to another extension or an ICD group.
Default
OFF
Value Range
ON or Flash, OFF
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.8 Call Pickup
10.1.1 LED Indication
DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call
Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified extension. To enable this setting,
DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to ON or Flash.
Default
Enable
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 409
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Value Range
Disable: The DSS button will light up when a call arrives, but pressing it will not pick up the call.
Enable: The DSS button will flash when a call arrives, and pressing it will pick up the call.
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.8 Call Pickup
DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for ICD Group Call
Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified incoming call distribution group.
To enable this setting, DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to ON or
Flash.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: The DSS button will light up when a call arrives, but pressing it will not pick up the call.
Enable: The DSS button will flash when a call arrives, and pressing it will pick up the call.
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.8 Call Pickup
DSS Key—Automatic Transfer for Extension Call
Specifies whether pressing a DSS or SDN button during an extension-to-extension call disconnects the current call or places the call on consultation hold.
Default
Disable
410 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Value Range
Disable: The PBX disconnects the current call, and calls the extension assigned to the DSS or SDN button.
Enable: The PBX places the current call on consultation hold.
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.10 Call Transfer
Transfer—Transfer to busy Extension without BSS Operation
Enables a transferred call to be queued when the transfer destination is busy.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: The call is not transferred. (If the transfer destination has enabled the call waiting notification feature, it is possible to inform the destination about the call transfer.)
Enable: The transferred call is queued for the time period specified in
Recall—Transfer Recall in 4.5 [2-3]
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
3.1.10 Call Transfer
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
Transfer—Automatic Answer for Transferred Call
Enables transferred calls (including direct extension calls) to be automatically answered, when using the
Hands-free Answerback feature.
Default
Disable
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 411
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
8.1.1 Hands-free Answerback
Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDN—when Transfer (CLIP of Held Party)
Enables the transfer of related CLIP information when a party on hold is transferred. When set to "Enable", the transfer destination will receive the original caller’s CLIP information, not the information of the extension that performed the transfer.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDN—when ICD Group with Cellular Phone
Selects whether the CLIP number of the calling party or of the virtual PS is sent to the virtual PS’s forwarding destination to identify the origin of a CO line call received at an ICD Group containing a virtual PS.
This setting only applies to calls automatically forwarded to public CO lines using the virtual PS feature.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: The CLIP number assigned to the virtual PS is sent.
Enable: The CLIP number of the calling party is sent.
412 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.18 Private Network Features—Network ICD Group
9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations
Private Network—Public Call through Private Network—Minimum Public Caller
ID Digits
Specifies the minimum length of Caller ID required for a call from a private network to be considered as a call from a public network.
Default
9
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Private Network—TIE Call by Extension Numbering (Optional SD Card
Required)
Enables extensions at two PBXs connected in a network (not including a VoIP network) to have the same leading number. For example, extension 101 is registered at PBX 1, and extension 102 is registered at PBX
2. Only the Extension Number Method is supported.
If disabled, different leading numbers need to be assigned for extensions at each PBX.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 413
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Leading Number
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
System Wireless—Out of Range Registration
Selects whether the PBX can set the status of a PS to Out of Range if no signal is received from the PS for a preset length of time. This feature must be enabled to allow PS roaming.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer
Feature Manual References
13.1.19 Private Network Features—PS Roaming by Network ICD Group
System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD
Selects whether call information (such as Caller ID) is shown on the display of a PDN extension PS (i.e., a PS with one or more PDN buttons) when a call is received while delayed ringing is set.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
414 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Option 5
SLT—SLT Hold Mode
Selects how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT. For details of each mode, see "3.1.4 Call Hold" in the Feature Manual.
Default
Mode 2
Value Range
Mode 1, Mode 2, Mode 3, Mode 4
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.4 Call Hold
Whisper OHCA—for SLT / APT / KX-T72xx
Enables the use of Whisper OHCA to SLTs and IP-PTs, and DPTs other than KX-T7400 series, KX-T7600 series, or KX-DT300 series.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 415
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Feature Manual References
20.1.4 Whisper OHCA
Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting for Extension Call
Selects whether Busy Station Signaling (BSS) is automatically performed when an extension user calls a busy extension.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES
PT Feature Access—No. 1–8
Specifies the System Feature Access Menu (1–8) shown on the display of an extension.
Default
System Feature Access Menu 1: Call Back Cancel
System Feature Access Menu 2: Call Pickup Direct
System Feature Access Menu 3: Call Pickup Group
System Feature Access Menu 4: Doorphone Call
System Feature Access Menu 5: Door Open
System Feature Access Menu 6: External BGM
System Feature Access Menu 7: Paging
System Feature Access Menu 8: Relay On
Value Range
None, Call Back Cancel, Call Pickup Direct, Call Pickup Group, Doorphone Call, Door Open, Relay On,
External BGM, Paging
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
416 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Option—Fwd from ISDN to ISDN
Specifies whether alert messages are sent to the ISDN network. This setting should be enabled for networks that disconnect a call if an alert message is not received.
Default
Mode1
Value Range
Mode1: Disable
Mode2: Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Option 6 (CTI)
1st Party CTI—System status retry interval timer
Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for First Party Call
Control CTI.
Default
60 s
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 417
4.18 [2-9] System Options
1st Party CTI—System status retry counter
Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for First Party Call Control CTI. When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times without success, the PBX assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost.
Default
5
Value Range
0–10
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
1st Party CTI—CDR retry interval timer
Specifies the length of time until the alive check of CDR (Call Detail Recording) is retried when no response is received, for First Party Call Control CTI.
Default
20 s
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
3rd Party CTI—System status retry interval timer
Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for Third Party Call
Control CTI.
418 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Default
60 s
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
3rd Party CTI—System status retry counter
Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number of times without success, the PBX assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost.
Default
5
Value Range
0–10
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
3rd Party CTI—CDR retry interval timer
Specifies the length of time until the alive check of CDR is retried when no response is received, for Third Party
Call Control CTI.
Default
20 s
Value Range
0–60 s
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 419
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
3rd Party CTI—CDR retry counter
Specifies the number of times that the alive check of CDR is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times, the association is released automatically.
Default
1
Value Range
0–10
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
CTI Multi PBX Control—USB Serial Number
Specifies the serial number assigned to this PBX’s USB data transfers, used when multiple PBXs are connected via USB to one PC (for example, for CTI).
Default
1
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
420 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Feature Manual References
None
CTI Make Call—SLT Ring
Specifies whether to ring an SLT when a call is made from CTI, instead of the SLT.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 421
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed.
Extension Caller ID Modulation Type
Specifies the modulation frequency to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Default
Bell202(Bellcore)
Value Range
V.23(ETSI), Bell202(Bellcore)
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Channel Seizure Signal Bits
Specifies the number of seizure bits to send when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Default
300 bits
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=3–40) bits
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Mark Signal Bits
Specifies the number of mark bits to send when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
422 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Default
180 bits
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=3–40) bits
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Channel Seizure Wait Time
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to send the seizure signal following the first ring when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Default
512 ms
Value Range
64 ´ n (n=5–35) ms
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Caller ID Signal Type
Specifies the type of signal modulation to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT (reference only).
Default
FSK
Value Range
FSK
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 423
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Additional Local Trunk Access Code to Extension Caller ID
Enables the PBX to automatically add a CO Line Access number to the received telephone number when sending the Caller ID number of an incoming CO line call to an SLT.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Send Caller ID Date & Time to Extension
Enables the PBX to send the date and time of an incoming call when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
424 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Send Caller ID Name to Extension
Enables the PBX to send the caller’s name when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Send Caller ID Long Distance to Extension
Enables the PBX to send a call qualifier (Long Distance) (if received from the CO line) when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
FSK Transmission Level
Specifies the transmission level for FSK signal modulation.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 425
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Default
0 dB
Value Range
-14 dB, -12 dB, -10 dB, -8 dB, -6 dB, -4 dB, -2 dB, 0 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
426 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Gain levels for the External Pager/External BGM ports can be programmed.
Paging—EPG (External Pager)
Specifies the paging volume for the External Pager.
Default
3 dB
Value Range
-15–15 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
Paging—Paging Level from PT Speaker
Specifies the volume when paging is broadcast through the speaker of a PT.
Default
0 dB
Value Range
-15dB, -12dB, -9dB, -6dB, -3dB, 0dB, 3dB, 6dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
MOH—MOH (Music On Hold)
Specifies the music volume for the External BGM.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 427
4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Default
0 dB
Value Range
-11–11 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
11.1.4 Music on Hold
2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)
428 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
4.21 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card
4.21 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card
Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card.
Up Gain (To PBX)
Specifies the volume for audio signals from the selected type of card to the PBX.
Default
Depends on card type.
Value Range
-15–15 dB
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Down Gain (From PBX)
Specifies the volume for audio signals from the PBX to the selected type of card.
Default
Depends on card type.
Value Range
-15–15 dB
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 429
4.21 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card
430 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Section 5
[3] Group
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 431
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
CO lines can be organized into trunk groups. The settings of each trunk group determine the settings of the
CO lines within that group. A maximum of 64 trunk groups can be programmed.
For more information on trunk groups, see "7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES" in the Feature Manual.
Main
Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
COS
Specifies the COS of the trunk group, applied when making a call from a CO line to another CO line with TIE
Line Service.
If you wish to prevent such calls from being made, ensure that the COS specified here has a TRS level of "7"
assigned for all relevant time modes in 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings.
Default
7
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
432 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Line Hunting Order
Specifies the CO line hunting sequence for the trunk group. The hunting sequence can be programmed to start from the lowest or highest numbered CO lines, or to rotate uniformly among all CO lines.
Default
High -> Low
Value Range
High -> Low, Low -> High, Rotation
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
3.1.16 CO Line Access
CO-CO Duration Time
Specifies the length of time that a CO-to-CO line call can be maintained before being disconnected.
Default
10 min
Value Range
None, 1–60 min
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
3.1.17 CO Line Call Limitation
Extension-CO Duration Time
Specifies the length of time that an extension-to-CO line call can be maintained before being disconnected.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 433
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Default
10 min
Value Range
None, 1–60 min
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.17 CO Line Call Limitation
Caller ID Modification Table
Specifies the table to be used for modifying caller information (telephone number).
Default
1
Value Range
1–4
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Tone Detection
Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.
Default
Not stored.
434 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
DISA Tone Detection—Silence
Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated CO-to-CO line call by silence detection.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA Tone Detection—Continuous
Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated CO-to-CO line call by continuous signal detection.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 435
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic
Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated CO-to-CO line call by cyclic signal detection.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Silence
Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated CO-to-CO line call by silence detection.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
436 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Continuous
Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated CO-to-CO line call by continuous signal detection.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Cyclic
Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated CO-to-CO line call by cyclic signal detection.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Host PBX Access Code
Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.
Default
Not stored.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 437
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Host PBX Access Code 1–10
Specifies the feature number used to access a CO line from the host PBX.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
438 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
Trunk groups can be assigned a priority for Idle Line Access. When making a CO line call by Idle Line Access, the PBX will search trunk groups for an idle CO line according to the priority assigned here.
Trunk Group No. & Name
Specifies the trunk group assigned to the corresponding priority level.
Select the blank option to not assign a trunk group to the priority.
Default
Priority 1–64 = Trunk Group No. 1–64
Value Range
Trunk Group No. 1–64
Maintenance Console Location
5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
3.1.16 CO Line Access
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 439
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically according to preprogrammed modification tables, and then recorded for calling back.
Leading Digits
After the caller’s number is modified by the Length of Digits Modification Tables or CLIP Modification Tables, the PBX checks the leading digits of the modified number for an area code programmed in the Caller ID
Modification Table assigned to that trunk group. If it finds such a code, it removes digits and adds a number to the modified number. If this number is stored as a System Speed Dialing number, the caller’s name can be shown on a PT display and the call can be routed to a certain extension (CLI destination). A maximum of 4
Caller ID Modification Tables, each containing 10 local/international call data and 1 long distance code, can be programmed. Each trunk group can select a table for use. Select the desired table from the Modification
Table list.
If the modified number does not contain an area code programmed here, the PBX applies the Long Distance
Code settings to the modified number.
Area Code (for Local / International Call Data 1–10)
Specifies the leading number (area code) to look for in the incoming caller’s number.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 6 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Removed Number of Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be removed from the beginning of the incoming caller’s number.
Default
Local / International Call Data 1–10: 3
Long Distance Code: 0
Value Range
0–9
440 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller’s number in the place of the removed digits.
Default
Local / International Call Data 1–10: Not stored.
Long Distance Code: 1 (fixed)
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Length of Digits
The PBX adds a certain number of digits to the caller’s number depending on the length of digits, as programmed in the Length of Digits Modification Tables assigned to the trunk group. This modification is applied to incoming CO line calls routed through public networks when the type of network numbering plan is Unknown or not specified.
A maximum of 4 Length of Digits Modification Tables can be programmed. Select the desired table from the
Modification Table list.
If the length of digits of an incoming CO line call is less than the
National), the caller’s number is not modified.
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International)
Specifies the minimum number of digits required in the caller’s number for it to be recognized as an international
call. The value specified here must be larger than Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National).
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 441
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Default
12
Value Range
1–31
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National)
Specifies the minimum number of digits required in the caller’s number for it to be recognized as a national
call. The value specified here must be smaller than Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International).
Default
8
Value Range
0–30
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Added Number (for International)
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming telephone number when the total number of digits exceeds
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International).
Default
011
442 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Value Range
Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Added Number (for National)
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming telephone number when the total number of digits exceeds
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National) but does not exceed
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
CLIP
When incoming caller information is sent through an ISDN line and the type of the network numbering plan is
International, National, or Subscriber, the caller’s number can be modified as programmed in the Modification
Tables assigned to the trunk group. The modified number will then be recorded, and it is used for sending to the network as a CLIP number.
A maximum of 4 CLIP Modification Tables can be programmed. Select the desired table from the Modification
Table list.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 443
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Removed Number of Digits
Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming caller’s number for each type of network numbering plan.
Default
International: 0
National: 0
Subscriber: 0
Value Range
0–9
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller’s number in the place of the removed digits for each type of network numbering plan.
Default
International: 011
National: 1
Subscriber: Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
444 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan
The PBX sends all of the dialed digits at once after an extension user completes dialing. The PBX can recognize the end of dialing when the dialed telephone number starts with the programmed leading number and contains the programmed total number of digits.
When the PBX recognizes the end of dialing to an analog CO line, the PBX cancels the muting of the caller’s voice sent to the analog CO line immediately. If the PBX cannot recognize the end of dialing, the PBX mutes the caller’s voice sent to an analog CO line from the time at which the last digit is dialed until the analog CO line inter-digit timer expires.
4 tables can be programmed, each with a maximum of 50 leading numbers. Select the table to program from the Dialing Plan Table list.
To assign a set of leading numbers automatically, click Auto Assign.
Leading Number
Specifies the leading number to be regarded as the beginning of dialing.
Default
No. 1 in Dialing Plan Table 1: N11
No. 2 in Dialing Plan Table 1: NXX NXX XXXX
No. 3 in Dialing Plan Table 1: 1NXX NXX XXXX
Others: Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, N [2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9], P [0, 1], and X [0-9, *, and #])
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Feature Manual References
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
Removed Number of Digits
Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the number dialed by en-bloc dialing.
Default
0
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 445
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the number dialed by en-bloc dialing in the place of the removed digits.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
446 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.5 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan—Auto Assign
5.5 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan—Auto Assign
It is possible to assign a set of leading numbers automatically.
Select Auto Assigning Table
Selects the set of preset leading number values to assign to the active dialing plan table. When Type D is selected, you will be prompted to enter a 3-digit area code, and 7 "X"s, in cells 1 through 47 of the dialing plan table.
Default
Type A
Value Range
Type A: 1:N11, 2:NXX XXXX, 3:1NXX NXX XXXX, 4-50: Not stored
Type B: 1:N11, 2:NNX XXXX, 3:1NPX NXX XXXX, 4-50: Not stored
Type C: 1:N11, 2:NXX XXXX, 3:1NNX XXXX, 4:1NPX NXX XXXX, 5-50: Not stored
Type D: 1-47: Not stored, 48:N11, 49:NXX XXXX, 50:1NXX NXX XXXX
Type E: 1:N11, 2:NXX NXX XXXX, 3:1NXX NXX XXXX, 4-50: Not stored
Maintenance Console Location
5.5 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan—Auto Assign
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 447
5.6 [3-2] Extension Group
5.6 [3-2] Extension Group
Extensions can be assigned to a tenant according to their extension user groups. An extension user group can belong to only one tenant. However, one extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups and several paging groups. A maximum of 8 tenants can be programmed.
Extension Group Name
Specifies the name of the extension user group.
Default
Extension User Group 1–32: Extension Group 01–32
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant to which the extension user group belongs.
Default
1
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
448 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Feature Manual References
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
17.1.3 Tenant Service
5.6 [3-2] Extension Group
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 449
5.7 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
5.7 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to up to 8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 64 call pickup groups can be programmed.
To assign extension user groups to call pickup groups easily, click All Setting.
Extension Group Name
Indicates the name of the extension user group (reference only).
Default
Extension User Group 1–32: Extension Group 01–32
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.8 Call Pickup
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
Pickup Group—1st–8th
Selects the call pickup groups that the extension user group belongs to. One extension user group can be assigned to a maximum of 8 call pickup groups on this screen. To assign an extension user group to more than 8 call pickup groups, click All Setting.
Default
Same as extension user group number
Value Range
None, 01–64
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
450 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Feature Manual References
3.1.8 Call Pickup
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
5.7 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 451
5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting
5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting
Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to multiple call pickup groups.
Call Pickup Group Name
Specifies the name of the call pickup group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.8 Call Pickup
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
Extension Group 1–32
Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding pickup group.
Default
ON for the same-numbered call pickup group
Value Range
ON (blue), OFF
Maintenance Console Location
5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.8 Call Pickup
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
452 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.9 [3-4] Paging Group
5.9 [3-4] Paging Group
Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External pagers can also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. A maximum of 32 paging groups can be programmed.
To assign external pagers to paging groups, click External Pager. To assign extension user groups to paging groups easily, click All Setting.
Extension Group Name
Indicates the name of the extension user group (reference only).
Default
Extension User Group 1–32: Extension Group 01–32
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
Paging Group—1st–8th
Selects the paging groups that the extension user group belongs to. One extension user group can be assigned to a maximum of 8 paging groups on this screen. To assign an extension user group to more than 8 paging groups, click All Setting.
Default
Same as extension group number
Value Range
None, 01–32
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 453
5.9 [3-4] Paging Group
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
454 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.
Paging Group Name
Specifies the name of the paging group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
Extension Group 1–32
Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding paging group.
Default
ON for same numbered paging group
Value Range
ON (blue), OFF (white)
Maintenance Console Location
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 455
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
External pagers can be assigned to a paging group. One external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.
Paging Group Name
Indicates the name of the paging group (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
External Pager 1
Specifies whether the external pager belongs to the corresponding paging group.
Default
ON
Value Range
ON (blue), OFF
Maintenance Console Location
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
456 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
External Pager 2
Specifies whether the external pager belongs to the corresponding paging group.
Default
ON
Value Range
ON (blue), OFF
Maintenance Console Location
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 457
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—
Group Settings
Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed. A maximum of 128 incoming call distribution groups can be programmed.
Extension List View). To assign extensions to ICD groups and change extension settings, click Member
List.
For more information on ICD Groups, see "9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES" in the Feature Manual.
Main
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Groups 001–064: 601–664
Groups 065–128: Not stored
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
ICD Group 001–ICD Group 128
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
458 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Distribution Method
Selects the method for distributing calls to idle extensions of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Ring
Value Range
Ring, UCD, Priority Hunting
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
Call Waiting Distribution
Selects the call waiting distribution method for busy extensions of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Distribution
Value Range
All, Distribution
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 459
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
FWD Mode
Specifies whether extensions in FWD mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Ring
Value Range
No Ring, Ring
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
DND Mode
Specifies whether extensions in DND mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group.
Default
No Ring
Value Range
No Ring, Ring
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant to which the incoming call distribution group belongs, to determine the Time Table and the audio source for the group. (The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number.)
Default
1
460 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
8.6 [6-6] Tenant— Music On Hold
Feature Manual References
11.1.4 Music on Hold
17.1.3 Tenant Service
COS
Specifies the COS of the incoming call distribution group. Depending on the COS, calls from certain extensions are restricted as determined by the Internal Call Block feature. Also, when calls are forwarded or overflowed to a CO line, the TRS assigned for the COS of the incoming call distribution group applies.
Default
1
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
4.13 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
Feature Manual References
9.1.14 Internal Call Block
CLIP on G-DN Button
Specifies the CLIP number sent to the network when making calls using the ICD Group button.
Default
Not stored.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 461
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Overflow Queuing Busy
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Groups 001–064: 601–664
Groups 065–128: Not stored
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
ICD Group 001–ICD Group 128
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
462 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Queuing Busy—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the overflow destination of calls that cannot be queued in each time mode.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow
Queuing Busy—Queue Call Capacity
Specifies the number of calls that can wait in a queue.
Default
30
Value Range
None, 1–30
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 463
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
Overflow No Answer
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Groups 001–064: 601–664
Groups 065–128: Not stored
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
ICD Group 001–ICD Group 128
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
464 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the overflow destination of queued calls when they are not answered or are redirected by Manual
Queue Redirection in each time mode.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow
Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Overflow Time
Specifies the length of time calls wait in a queue before they are redirected to the overflow destination.
Default
None
Value Range
None, 10 ´ n (n=1–125) s
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow
Hurry-up Level
Specifies the number of calls to hold in the queue before prompting Manual Queue Redirection by flashing the
Hurry-up button.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 465
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Default
None
Value Range
None, 1–30
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
Queuing Time Table
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Groups 001–064: 601–664
Groups 065–128: Not stored
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
ICD Group 001–ICD Group 128
466 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Queuing Time Table—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the Queuing Time Table to be used in each time mode.
Default
None
Value Range
None, Table 1–Table 64
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
Queuing Time Table When Extension Ringing
Enables the PBX to play messages/BGM to the caller according to the Queuing Time Table, when the call arrives at an extension without being queued or after being queued.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable (Ringback Tone), Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 467
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Miscellaneous
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Groups 001–064: 601–664
Groups 065–128: Not stored
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
ICD Group 001–ICD Group 128
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
468 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
None
Extension No Answer Redirection Time
Specifies the length of time that a call queues at an extension before it is redirected to the next member extension of the incoming call distribution group, in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution method.
Default
None
Value Range
None, 10 ´ n (n=1–15) s
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out
Specifies the number of consecutive unanswered calls before a member extension is automatically logged out from the incoming call distribution group.
Default
None
Value Range
None, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 469
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Maximum No. of Busy Extension
Specifies the number of extensions that can accept calls simultaneously in the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Max.
Value Range
Max.: Call arrives at an idle extension.
1–32: Call will not arrive at an idle extension when the number of busy extensions exceeds the assigned number.
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
Last Extension Log-out
Specifies whether the last extension logged-in to the incoming call distribution group is allowed to log out.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
VIP Call Mode
Enables VIP Call mode, to prioritize calls received from multiple incoming call distribution groups.
Default
Disable
470 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.8 ICD Group Features—VIP Call
Supervisor Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the incoming call distribution group’s supervisor. The supervisor can monitor and control the status of each member of the group using a 6-line display PT. The supervisor extension need not belong to the group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.7 ICD Group Features—Supervisory
Programmed Mailbox No.
Specifies the mailbox number of the incoming call distribution group’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems
(VPS) with DTMF Integration.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 471
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Group Log / Group FWD
To set extension numbers easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Groups 001–064: 601–664
Groups 065–128: Not stored
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
ICD Group 001–ICD Group 128
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
472 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Incoming Call Log Memory
Specifies the number of unanswered calls to the incoming call distribution group that can be logged in the call log memory.
Default
10
Value Range
0–100
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming
Group FWD Call from CO—Setting
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming CO line calls (reference only).
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 473
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Group FWD Call from CO—Destination
Specifies the forward destination of incoming CO line calls directed to the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Group FWD Call from Extension—Setting
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Group FWD Call from Extension—Destination
Specifies the forward destination of incoming intercom calls directed to the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret] and P [Pause])
474 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 475
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—
Group Settings—Member List
Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 32 members (extensions) assigned to it, and each member can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member of multiple incoming call distribution groups. An ICD Group can also contain cellular phones, and network ICD groups (ICD groups at other PBXs in a network) using virtual PS (see "19.1.2 Virtual PS" in the Feature
Manual). The forward destination assigned to a virtual PS (e.g., a cellular phone) can act as a member of an
ICD group. Select the desired ICD group (1–128) from the ICD Group No. list.
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of each member. In addition to the extension numbers of PT, SLT, PS, and
T1-OPX extensions, floating extension numbers of PS Ring groups can also be specified.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group— Floating Extension Number
Feature Manual References
9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
476 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group— Group Name
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name
Feature Manual References
9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES
Delayed Ring
Specifies the delayed ringing setting of each member. (Applicable when the call distribution method of the incoming call distribution group is set to Ring.)
Default
Immediate
Value Range
Immediate, 1–6 Rings, No Ring
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before the member extension can accept another call.
This timer is used when "
Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "ICD Group Member" in
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.
Default
0 s
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=0–300) s
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—
Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 477
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8—
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
478 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.14 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
5.14 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—
Queuing Time Table
A Queuing Time Table can contain up to 16 sequences which control how calls waiting in a queue are handled.
A maximum of 64 Queuing Time Tables can be programmed.
Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–16
Specifies the command activated by the corresponding sequence.
Default
None
Value Range
None: Redirects the call to the next sequence.
Overflow: Redirects the call to the overflow destination when there is no answer.
Disconnect: Disconnects the line.
Sequence 01–16: Redirects the call to a different sequence.
Wait 5 ´ n (n=1–16) s: If preceded by an OGM, plays the Music on Hold for the specified period of time; if not preceded by an OGM, sends a ringback tone for the specified period of time.
OGM 01–64: Sends a certain OGM.
Maintenance Console Location
5.14 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
11.1.4 Music on Hold
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 479
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—
Miscellaneous
Optional settings related to Incoming Call Distribution Groups can be programmed.
Options—Call Log to ICD Group for Answered Call
Selects whether answered calls to an ICD Group are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the group, in addition to the log of the extension that answered the call.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES
Options—ICD Group Key Mode
Selects whether ICD Group buttons at extensions operate as normal or in Enhanced Phantom button mode.
When set to Enhanced Phantom mode, creating an ICD Group button at an extension using PT personal programming automatically registers the extension as a member of the relevant ICD Group. The extension user can also specify the delayed ringing settings.
Default
Group DN
Value Range
Group DN, Enhanced Phantom
Maintenance Console Location
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List—
480 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Feature Manual References
9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES
Options—Longest Idle Distribution (Optional SD Card Required)
Selects whether incoming calls are distributed to idle extensions evenly in order (UCD), or to the extension that has been idle the longest (ACD).
Default
Enable (ACD)
Value Range
Disable (UCD), Enable (ACD)
Maintenance Console Location
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
Selects whether the ICD Group member wrap-up timer or extension wrap-up timer is used.
If Extension is selected here,
Wrap-up Timer on 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group
Settings—Member List becomes unavailable. If ICD Group Member is selected, Wrap-up Timer on
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings and 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension
Default
Extension
Value Range
Extension: The timer is activated after all calls to or from the extension, including a retrieved call on hold.
ICD Group Member: The timer is only activated after calls to the extension through an ICD Group.
Maintenance Console Location
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List—
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8—
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 481
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
482 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
If an extension within an idle extension hunting group is called when it is busy or in DND mode, the call can be redirected to another extension in the same hunting group, according to a preprogrammed hunting type. If there is no idle extension in the group, the call can then be redirected to the overflow destination, which can be different depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). A maximum of 64 hunting groups can be programmed, each containing up to 16 extensions.
To assign members to the group, click Member List. To assign extensions as overflow destinations easily,
click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Hunting Group Name
Specifies the name of the hunting group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting
Hunting Type
Specifies the hunting type for the hunting group.
Default
Circular
Value Range
Circular: Circulates until the call is answered or overflowed
Terminated: Terminates at the last extension
Maintenance Console Location
5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 483
5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Feature Manual References
9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
Overflow—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the overflow destination of an unanswered call in each time mode.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting
484 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to program from the Hunting
Group No. list.
To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in Extension Number or click Extension
copy, select the group, and click OK.
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the hunting group member.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Feature Manual References
9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified in Extension Number above
(reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Feature Manual References
9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 485
5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DPT Integration can be connected to DPT ports of the PBX.
The DPT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DPT) Group.
2 VM (DPT) Groups can be programmed.
Call Waiting on VM Group
Enables the queuing of calls when all extension ports of the VM (DPT) group are busy. (Call Waiting tone is not sent to any VM port.)
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Intercept to Mailbox
Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the VPS when a call is redirected to the VM (DPT) group by Intercept Routing. When the VPS receives the mailbox number, the VPS answers the call with the appropriate mailbox.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
486 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Transfer Recall to Mailbox
Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the transfer destination extension to the VPS in these situations: (1) when a call is transferred to an extension by the Call Transfer without Announcement feature using the Automated Attendant (AA) service of the VPS, and the call is not answered within a programmed time period; (2) when the VPS is assigned as the Transfer Recall destination of a certain extension. When the
VPS receives the mailbox number, the VPS answers the call with the appropriate mailbox.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 487
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
A VM (DPT) group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls.
To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.
Floating Extension No.
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group.
Default
VM Unit No. 1: 500
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Group Name
Specifies the name of the VM (DPT) group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM
(DPT) group.
Default
VM Unit No. x: Voicemail x
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
488 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 489
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member
List
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
490 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Feature Manual References
5.1.7 Extension Port Configuration
VM Unit No.
Indicates the unit number of the connected VPS (reference only).
Default
Current unit number
Value Range
1, 2
Maintenance Console Location
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
VM Port No.
Indicates the VM port number for the port (reference only).
Default
1
Value Range
1–12
Maintenance Console Location
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 491
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Extension No.
Indicates the extension number assigned to the VM port (reference only).
Default
Assigned extension number
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
492 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DTMF Integration can be connected to SLT ports of the
PBX. The SLT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DTMF) Group. A maximum of 2 VM
(DTMF) Groups can be programmed.
For more information on Voice Mail groups and DTMF integration, see "19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM)
Group" and "19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration" in the Feature Manual.
VM DTMF Status Signal—Ringback Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is ringing.
Default
1
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—Busy Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is busy.
Default
2
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 493
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
VM DTMF Status Signal—Reorder Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the dialed number is invalid.
Default
3
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—DND Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is in DND mode.
Default
4
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—Answer
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension has answered the call.
Default
5
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
494 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—Confirm
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when a certain feature (e.g., Message Waiting) has been successfully set or canceled on an extension.
Default
9
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—Disconnect
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the caller hangs up.
Default
#9
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 495
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Feature Manual References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Ringback Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the VPS and the PBX is calling another port of the VPS.
Default
6
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Busy Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the VPS and all ports of the VPS are busy.
Default
7
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
496 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to Extension Ringback Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to another extension and the PBX is calling the destination extension.
Default
8
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
VM DTMF Command—Recording Message
Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS when a call is forwarded, intercepted, or transferred to the VPS, so that the caller can leave a message in a certain mailbox.
Default
H
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
VM DTMF Command—Listening Message
Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS when an extension user answers a message waiting notification from the VPS, so that the extension user can retrieve a new message in a certain mailbox without having to dial the mailbox number manually.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 497
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Default
*H
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
11.1.3 Message Waiting
VM DTMF Command—Switching to AA
Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS to switch from VM Service Mode to AA Service Mode.
Default
#8
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
VM DTMF Command—Switching to VM
Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS to switch from AA Service Mode to VM Service Mode.
Default
#6
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])
498 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Timing—DTMF Length for VM
Specifies the length of DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS.
Default
80 ms
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Timing—Inter-digit Time
Specifies the length of pause time between DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS.
Default
80 ms
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 499
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Feature Manual References
None
Timing—Waiting Time before Sending Follow on ID
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the Follow on ID to the VPS after the VPS has answered a call.
Default
1.5 s
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.0 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Timing—Waiting Time before Sending VM DTMF Status Signal
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the DTMF status signal to the VPS after the
VPS has finished dialing.
Default
1.5 s
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.0 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
500 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Others—Call Waiting on VM Group
Enables the queuing of calls when all extension ports of the VM (DTMF) group are busy. (Call Waiting tone is not sent to any VM port.)
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
Others—FWD to the VPS Sequence
Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is forwarded to the VPS, so that the VPS can answer the call either with a mailbox or in the AA service mode. It is also possible to send no DTMF signal to the VPS.
Default
Answer by Mailbox
Value Range
None, Answer by Mailbox, AA
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Others—Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence
Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is intercepted to the VPS, so that the VPS can answer the call either with a mailbox or in the AA service mode. It is also possible to send no DTMF signal to the VPS.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 501
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Default
None
Value Range
None, Answer by Mailbox, AA
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
Others—Mailbox for Extension
Specifies whether the mailboxes use the same numbers as the extensions and incoming call distribution groups, or use different numbers as programmed for each extension or incoming call distribution group.
Default
Extension Number
Value Range
Extension Number, Programmed Mailbox Number
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— Programmed Mailbox
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Feature Manual References
None
Others—Message Waiting Lamp Control
Specifies whether the PBX or VPS cancels the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning off the MESSAGE button light) when an extension user answers the message waiting notification from the VPS.
Default
By PBX
502 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Value Range
By PBX, By VM
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
11.1.3 Message Waiting
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 503
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
A VM (DTMF) group has a floating extension number, and can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls.
To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.
Floating Ext. No.
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF) group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Group Name
Specifies the name of the VM (DTMF) group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM
(DTMF) group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
504 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Type
Specifies the initial service mode in which the VPS answers calls.
Default
AA
Value Range
AA, VM
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 505
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—
Member List
Select the group to program from the VM(DTMF) Group Number list.
Setting). To copy members to another group, click Member List Copy, select the group, and click OK.
Extension Number of the SLT Port Connected to VM
Specifies the extension number assigned to the SLT port that is connected to the VPS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
506 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Feature Manual References
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 507
5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group
5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group
A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating extension number and name. One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS ring groups can be programmed, each containing up to 64 PS extensions.
To add PSs to the PS Ring Group, click Member List.
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the PS ring group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.29 PS Ring Group
Group Name
Specifies the name of the PS ring group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the PS ring group when
Incoming Trunk Call Information Display on this screen is set to Called Number.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.29 PS Ring Group
508 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group
Incoming Trunk Call Information Display
Specifies the information of the incoming CO line call to be shown on the displays of the PSs that belong to the PS ring group. If the caller’s name or called party’s name is not recognized, the telephone number will be shown.
Default
Caller ID
Value Range
Caller ID, Called Number
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.29 PS Ring Group
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 509
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
Each PS Ring Group can have up to 64 PS extensions assigned. Select the group to program from the PS
Ring Group Number list.
OK.
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the PS assigned to the PS Ring Group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits
Maintenance Console Location
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
13.1.29 PS Ring Group
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
510 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Feature Manual References
13.1.29 PS Ring Group
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 511
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
512 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Section 6
[4] Extension
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 513
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
For each slot in which an extension card is installed, a certain number of extension ports are displayed. For each extension port, various extension settings can be assigned.
To assign a set of CLIP numbers automatically, click CLIP Generate. To assign names and tenants to
Main
Shelf
Indicates the shelf type (reference only).
Default
Current shelf type
Value Range
Physical, Virtual
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
514 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
Starting at 101
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 515
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port Type
Indicates the extension port type (reference only).
Default
Current port type
Value Range
DPT: DPT port (DLC)
SLT: SLT port (SLC)
S-Hybrid: Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
S-Hybrid(SLT): XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
S-Hybrid(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
DPT(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of DPT port (DLC)
ISDN: ISDN port (PRI)
OPX: T1-OPX port (T1)
IP-EXT: Virtual IP-Extension port (V-IPEXT)
SIP: Virtual SIP Extension port (V-SIPEXT)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.7 Extension Port Configuration
Telephone Type
Indicates the type of telephone connected to the extension port (reference only).
516 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Default
Current connected telephone type
Value Range
DPT (15V)/DPT (40V): DPT is connected.
APT (15V): APT is connected.
DSS: DSS Console is connected.
VM: VPS is connected.
SLT: SLT is connected (or no telephone is connected to the Super Hybrid or SLT port).
ISDN-Ext: ISDN telephone is connected.
No Connection: No telephone is connected.
CS: CS is connected.
CS-M: High-density CS is connected with its master port.
CS-S1–3: High-density CS is connected with its slave port.
IP-PT: IP-PT belonging to the V-IPEXT card is connected.
SIP: SIP Extension is connected.
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Group
Specifies the extension user group to which the extension belongs. Extension user groups are used to compose tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups.
Default
For Extensions connected with V-IPEXT card:
31
For Extensions connected with other cards:
1
Value Range
1–32
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 517
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
17.1.3 Tenant Service
COS
Specifies the COS of the extension.
Default
1
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
Extension PIN
Specifies the PIN of the extension.
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend: a.
Keeping PINs secret.
b.
Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c.
Changing PINs frequently.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0-9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
518 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)
Intercept Destination
Shelf
Indicates the shelf type (reference only).
Default
Current shelf type
Value Range
Physical, Virtual
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 519
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
Starting at 101
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
520 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and
Intercept Routing–DND.
Note that Intercept Routing–Busy calls are routed using
Intercept Destination—When Called Party is
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Feature Manual References
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 521
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
Intercept No Answer Time
Shelf
Indicates the shelf type (reference only).
Default
Current shelf type
Value Range
Physical, Virtual
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
522 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
Starting at 101
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 523
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode.
When this setting is set to "0", the system timer is used.
Default
0
Value Range
0–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day,
Feature Manual References
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
ISDN CLIP
Shelf
Indicates the shelf type (reference only).
Default
Current shelf type
Value Range
Physical, Virtual
524 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 525
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
Starting at 101
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
526 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
CLIP ID
Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party’s telephone display when making a CO line call.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
CLIP on Extension/CO
Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party’s telephone.
Default
Extension
Value Range
Extension: Show the CLIP number specified in
CO: Show the CLIP number specified in
Subscriber Number in 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting—
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—ISDN CLIP—
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
CLIR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a public network CO line call.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 527
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
COLR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the extension on the caller’s telephone display when answering a call.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Option 1
Shelf
Indicates the shelf type (reference only).
Default
Current shelf type
Value Range
Physical, Virtual
528 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 529
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
Starting at 101
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
530 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Wireless XDP
Specifies the extension number of the PS with which Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is established. To enable
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, the PS must be turned off once and then turned on after assigning this setting.
This setting is not available when the software is in Batch mode. In addition, a PS with PDN or SDN buttons cannot be used for Wireless XDP Parallel Mode.
When changing the port type of an extension port in
DPT Type—Type on the 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port
Property - Extension Port screen, the
Wireless XDP setting must be deleted first.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Ring Pattern Table
Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the extension.
Default
1
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Feature Manual References
15.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 531
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programmed Mailbox No.
Specifies the mailbox number of the extension’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF
Integration.
Default
Same number as the corresponding extension number.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Transfer Recall Destination
Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer without
Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.10 Call Transfer
ARS Itemized Code
Specifies the itemized billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made from the extension for accounting and billing purposes.
Default
Not stored.
532 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
19.1.1 Verification Code Entry
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Option 2
Shelf
Indicates the shelf type (reference only).
Default
Current shelf type
Value Range
Physical, Virtual
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 533
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
Starting at 101
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
534 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions.
Default
BSS
Value Range
Off: No notification
BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker
OHCA: Voice from the built-in speaker
W-OHCA: Voice from the handset
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 535
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES
Automatic C. Waiting
Specifies whether to receive call waiting notifications for calls from a CO line, doorphone calls, and calls via an incoming call distribution group.
Default
On
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES
Pickup Dial Set
automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
Feature Manual References
8.1.6 Hot Line
536 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Pickup Dial No.
Specifies the number to be dialed automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
8.1.6 Hot Line
Data Mode
Sets or cancels the protection against tones or interruptions from other extensions during communication.
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.1 Data Line Security
Option 3
Shelf
Indicates the shelf type (reference only).
Default
Current shelf type
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 537
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Value Range
Physical, Virtual
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
538 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
Starting at 101
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 539
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
None
Call Pickup Deny
Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your extension
Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your extension
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.8 Call Pickup
Executive Override Deny
Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call
Enable: Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.3 Executive Busy Override
540 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Absent Message
Specifies the Personal Absent Message which, unlike the System Absent Message, can be customized for each extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.1 Absent Message
Intercom Call by Voice
Selects the method of receiving intercom calls. When Deny Voice Call is selected, the extension will always ring when receiving calls, regardless of how the caller wants to make the call.
Default
Tone Call
Value Range
Tone Call, Voice Call, Deny Voice Call
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.13 Intercom Call
Option 4
Shelf
Indicates the shelf type (reference only).
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 541
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Default
Current shelf type
Value Range
Physical, Virtual
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
542 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
Starting at 101
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 543
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Outgoing Preferred Line
Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call.
Default
ICM/PDN
Value Range
No Line: No line is seized.
Idle: An idle CO line is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups.
ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-84: A CO line programmed for a flexible button (F-1–F-84) is seized. A flexible button customized as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
10.1.3 Line Preference—Outgoing
Incoming Preferred Line
Selects the line on which an incoming call is answered after going off-hook.
Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here, a call ringing at any PDN button on the extension will be answered when going off-hook.
Default
Ringing Line
Value Range
No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call.
Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected.
PDN: The call arriving at any PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-84: The call arriving at a flexible button (F-1–F-84) is selected. A flexible button customized as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
544 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
10.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming
Call Waiting Tone Type
Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension.
Default
CW Tone 1
Value Range
CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.12 Call Waiting Tone
LCS Recording Mode
Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the extension’s mailbox when the extension user answers a call that was being monitored.
Default
Stop Record
Value Range
Stop Record, Keep Record
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 545
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
LCS Answer Mode
Specifies whether the extension’s mailbox is monitored in Hands-free or Private mode.
Default
Hands free
Value Range
Hands free: Monitor through the built-in speaker
Private: Monitor through the handset or the built-in speaker after hearing a warning tone
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
8.1.2 Hands-free Operation
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Option 5
Shelf
Indicates the shelf type (reference only).
Default
Current shelf type
Value Range
Physical, Virtual
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
546 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
Starting at 101
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 547
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Display Language
Selects the display language of the extension telephone.
Default
Language1
Value Range
Language1–Language5
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
548 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.9 Display Information
Incoming Call Display
Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the extension’s display.
Default
Caller ID Name
Value Range
Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DID Name
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.9 Display Information
Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a CO line call.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.9 Display Information
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 549
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Key Pad Tone
Specifies whether key pad tones are heard when dialing.
Default
On
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Automatic Answer for CO Call
Enables the extension to answer an incoming CO line call automatically after a certain number of rings without going off-hook, when Hands-free Answerback has been set on the extension. This setting is only effective
when Forced Automatic Answer on this screen has been set to Off.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
8.1.1 Hands-free Answerback
Option 6
Shelf
Indicates the shelf type (reference only).
550 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Default
Current shelf type
Value Range
Physical, Virtual
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 551
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
Starting at 101
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
552 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Forced Automatic Answer
Specifies whether the extension automatically answers all incoming calls (both intercom and CO line calls) without going off-hook, regardless of the Hands-free Answerback setting.
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Flexible Button Programming Mode
Specifies whether the extension user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation, or only the One-touch
Dialing buttons. When the mode is set to One-touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2" before the number when customizing a One-touch Dialing button.
Default
No Limitation
Value Range
No Limitation, One-touch Dial
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 553
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
None
ICM Tone
Selects the ring tone for incoming calls arriving at the INTERCOM button or PDN buttons. Note that the ring tone specified here is applied to all PDN buttons on an extension.
Default
1
Value Range
KX-DT300 series (except KX-DT321)/KX-T7600 series/IP-PT (except KX-NT265/KX-NT321): 1–30
KX-DT321/KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.)
Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Display Lock / SVM Lock
Locks or unlocks the Incoming Call Log and Simplified Voice Message Log display (i.e., specifies whether other extension users can see the Incoming Call Log and SVM Log information at the extension).
Default
Unlock
Value Range
Unlock, Lock
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
554 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Paging Deny
Specifies whether paging of the extension from other extensions is enabled.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
Option 7
Shelf
Indicates the shelf type (reference only).
Default
Current shelf type
Value Range
Physical, Virtual
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 555
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
Starting at 101
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
556 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Character Input Mode
Selects the character table to be used for entering characters.
Default
Table 1
Value Range
Table 1: Standard mode
Table 2: Option mode
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 557
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
None
Flash Mode during CO Conversation
Selects the function of the FLASH/RECALL button during a CO line conversation.
Default
Flash Recall
Value Range
EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access)
6.1.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate
Incoming Call Log Memory
Specifies the number of incoming CO line calls that are retained in the extension’s Incoming Call Log memory.
Default
10
Value Range
0–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming
558 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Outgoing Call Log Memory
Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialed by the extension that are retained in the extension’s
Outgoing Call Log memory.
Default
5
Value Range
1–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
ISDN Bearer
Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically depending on the extension’s telephone type as follows:
PT: Speech
SLT: Audio
Default
Automatic
Value Range
Automatic, Speech, Audio
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
Option 8
Shelf
Indicates the shelf type (reference only).
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 559
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Default
Current shelf type
Value Range
Physical, Virtual
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
560 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
Starting at 101
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 561
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call)
Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Caller ID
Enables the extension to send Caller ID information to an SLT.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
562 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID
Specifies the length of time that the ringing for a call is delayed when the call follows immediately after the previous unanswered call. When receiving two calls in quick succession (e.g., when a call waiting in a queue is directed to an extension immediately after the previous unanswered call stops ringing), some SLTs require a pause, after the first call stops ringing, to receive the second call’s Caller ID information.
Default
0
Value Range
0–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before an extension will accept another call when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group.
This timer is used when "
Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "Extension" in 5.15 [3-5-3]
Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.
Default
0 s
Value Range
0–3000 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List—
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—
Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 563
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Option 9
Shelf
Indicates the shelf type (reference only).
Default
Current shelf type
Value Range
Physical, Virtual
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
564 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
Starting at 101
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 565
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
PDN Delayed Ringing
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons).
Default
Immediate
Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Built-in Communication Assistant
Specifies whether to enable or disable the Communication Assistant (CA) application for each extension.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Basic Only, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR—Port Number—
Built-in Communication Assistant Server
566 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 CA (Communication Assistant)
FWD / DND
Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each extension can be referred. FWD and DND
settings can be programmed separately for each extension in 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND.
Shelf
Indicates the shelf type (reference only).
Default
Current shelf type
Value Range
Physical, Virtual
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 567
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
Starting at 101
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
568 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
FWD Set for Call from CO
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming CO line calls (reference only).
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
DND Set for Call from CO
Indicates the current DND status for incoming CO line calls (reference only).
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 569
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)
FWD Mode for Call from CO
Indicates the forwarding type of incoming CO line calls (reference only).
Default
None
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD Destination for Call from CO
Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming CO line calls (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
570 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD Set for Call from Extension
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
DND Set for Call from Extension
Indicates the current DND status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)
FWD Mode for Call from Extension
Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 571
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Default
None
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD Destination for Call from Extension
Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD No Answer Time
Indicates the length of time that an incoming call rings at the extension before the call is forwarded (reference only).
Default
15 s
Value Range
0–120 s
572 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 573
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—
CLIP Generate
CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together.
Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten.
If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded.
Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext. Number)
Specifies the extension number of the first location to be programmed.
Default
Extension number of port 01 of the first extension card that is installed.
Value Range
Wired extension number
Maintenance Console Location
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Location Entry—Number to Generate
Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.
A CLIP number will only be assigned to connected wired extensions, even if the number entered here is larger than the total number of wired extensions.
Default
Depends on installed cards.
Value Range
1–total number of connected wired extensions
Maintenance Console Location
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
574 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Parameter—Deleting Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of an extension number when using it as part of the
CLIP number.
Default
0
Value Range
0–5
Maintenance Console Location
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Parameter—Head of ID
Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Parameter—Tail of ID
Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 575
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
576 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
For each extension, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and CO line calls. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Call from CO—Present Button Status
Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—External button.
Default
Current status
Value Range
OFF, FWD, DND
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
Call from CO—FWD Status Availability
Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming CO line calls.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button, if forward settings have been programmed.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 577
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Call from CO—DND Status Availability
Enables or disables the DND feature for incoming CO line calls.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)
Call from CO—FWD Mode
Specifies the circumstances when incoming CO line calls are forwarded.
Default
None
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Call from CO—FWD Destination
Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming CO line calls.
Default
Not stored.
578 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Call from Extension—Present Button Status
Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—Internal button.
Default
Current status
Value Range
OFF, FWD, DND
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
Call from Extension—FWD Status Availability
Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming intercom calls.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button, if forward settings have been programmed.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 579
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Call from Extension—DND Status Availability
Enables or disables the DND feature for incoming intercom calls.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)
Call from Extension—FWD Mode
Specifies the circumstances when incoming intercom calls are forwarded.
Default
None
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
580 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Call from Extension—FWD Destination
Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD No Answer Timer
Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the extension before the call is forwarded.
Default
15 s
Value Range
0–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 581
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
Personal Speed Dialing allows extension users to dial frequently dialed numbers using two-digit speed dialing numbers (00–99). A maximum of 100 Personal Speed Dialing numbers can be programmed for each extension.
Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
The available speed dialing numbers are shown in sets of 20. Select the desired set from the Personal Speed
Dialing No. list.
Speed Dialing Name
Specifies the name of the Personal Speed Dialing number to call using the Personal Speed Dialing Directory shown on the extension’s display.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.6 Speed Dialing, Personal
Dialing Number
Specifies the number to be dialed by the Personal Speed Dialing number.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.6 Speed Dialing, Personal
582 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Each flexible button can be customized to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 84 flexible buttons can be customized for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number /
Name list.
To copy the flexible button settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy To.
For more information on flexible buttons, see "6.1.3 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Manual.
Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible button.
Default
Single CO
Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, G-DN, Message Waiting, FWD/DND (Both),
FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External), Group Fwd (Internal),
Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Call Park, Call Log, Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up, Wrap-up, System
Alarm, Time Service, Answer, Release, TRS Level Change, CLIR, COLR, Headset, Time Service - Automatic/
Manual, Check In, Check Out, Cleaned Up, Two-way Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer,
NDSS, CTI, PDN, SDN
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
Feature Manual References
None
Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
Specifies the CO line to be accessed.
Default
1
Value Range
1–128
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 583
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
3.1.16 CO Line Access
Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
Specifies the trunk group to be accessed.
Default
1
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.16 CO Line Access
Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone.
Default
Automatic
Value Range
Automatic, Specific
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.7 Call Park
Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to are logged in to or logged out from.
584 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Default
None
Value Range
None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually.
All: All incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
Selects which time modes are switched manually.
Default
All
Value Range
All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
Specifies the TRS level to be used temporarily on a certain extension.
Default
1
Value Range
1–7
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 585
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
4.1.5 Dial Tone Transfer
Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.
Default
1
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for SDN)
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.
Default
Immediate
Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
586 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for DSS)
Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for G-DN)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Message Waiting)
Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the extension will check its own messages only.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 587
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and CO line calls are forwarded.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which CO line calls are forwarded.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
588 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are forwarded.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Call Log)
Specifies the extension’s own number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which call log information is displayed. If the cell is left empty, the extension will display its own call log information.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 589
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
590 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the extension’s mailbox.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 591
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN)
Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to this SDN button.
Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Dial (for One-touch)
Specifies the number to be dialed. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 One-touch Dialing buttons for extensions and DSS Consoles.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
592 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
12.1.4 One-touch Dialing
Dial (for NDSS)
Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station
Selection.
specified here.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
Label Name
Specifies the name of each flexible button on the KX-NT366 IP-PT. The name specified here is displayed on the LCD next to each button. A maximum of 48 flexible buttons can be customized for this extension.
Default
Key Location 1—48: 01—48
Key Location 49—84: Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 12 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 593
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 Self Labeling (KX-NT366 only)
Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode.
Default
1
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO,
Group CO, G-DN, SDN)
Specifies the ring tone type.
Default
1
Value Range
KX-DT300 series (except KX-DT321)/KX-T7600 series/IP-PT (except NT265/KX-NT321): 1–30
KX-DT321/NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.)
Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
594 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.
Default
0
Value Range
0–99
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.7 Call Park
Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch
Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 595
6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—
Flexible button data copy
The flexible button settings of an extension can be copied to different extensions.
Destination Extension Line
Select the number and name of the extension that will receive the copied settings. Multiple extensions can be selected. To select all extensions at once, click Select All.
When selecting multiple extensions, note that if the source extension has an SDN button, the copy operation cannot be performed.
Maintenance Console Location
6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
None
596 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button
6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button
Each Programmable Feature (PF) button can be customized to access a certain feature with one touch. A maximum of 12 PF buttons can be customized for each extension. Select the desired extension from the
Extension Number / Name list.
Type
Specifies whether to store a dialing number for the one-touch access.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Not Stored, One Touch
Maintenance Console Location
6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
Dial
Specifies the number to be dialed.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 597
6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1)
Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension. This setting is automatically set to ON when the feature is used, and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF, to cancel data transmission.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF, ON
Maintenance Console Location
6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
598 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice
Message
The Simplified Voice Message feature can be provided for each extension.
This screen allows you to specify which extension uses this feature, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for each extension.
For more information on Simplified Voice Message, see "16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)" in the
Feature Manual.
Shelf
Indicates the shelf type (reference only).
Default
Current shelf type
Value Range
Physical, Virtual
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 599
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
600 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Manual References
None
Simplified Voice Message
Selects which card (IPCMPR or ESVM) to use to store and play back greetings and messages for the extension.
Each extension must be assigned to a specific card and block within the card, and can only use the assigned card/block. If two cards are used in the PBX, you should assign a number of extensions to each card, to ensure that the necessary resources, such as message recording space, are available for each extension.
Default
Card1(A)
Value Range
None, Card1(A), Card1(B), Card2(A), Card2(B)
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Maximum SVM Log
Specifies the maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be stored for the extension.
Default
10
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 601
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Value Range
1–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
602 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
For each Portable Station (PS), various extension settings can be assigned. A maximum of 64 PSs can be programmed.
Extension Group for more details.
Main
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 603
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Property
Indicates the property (reference only).
Default
Portable Station
Value Range
Portable Station
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Group
Specifies the extension user group to which the PS belongs. The extension user group is used to compose tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups.
Default
1
Value Range
1–32
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
17.1.3 Tenant Service
COS
Specifies the COS of the PS.
Default
1
604 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
Extension PIN
Specifies the PIN of the PS.
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend: a.
Keeping PINs secret.
b.
Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c.
Changing PINs frequently.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)
Intercept Destination
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 605
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and
Intercept Routing–DND.
Note that, Intercept Routing–Busy calls are routed using Intercept Destination—When Called Party is
Default
Not stored.
606 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Feature Manual References
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
Intercept No Answer Time
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 607
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode.
When this setting is set to "0", the system timer is used.
Default
0
Value Range
0–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
608 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day,
Feature Manual References
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
ISDN CLIP
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 609
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
None
CLIP ID
Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party’s telephone display when making a CO line call.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
CLIP on Extension/CO
Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party’s telephone.
Default
Extension
Value Range
Extension: Show the CLIP number specified in
CO: Show the CLIP number specified in
Subscriber Number in 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—ISDN CLIP—
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
610 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
CLIR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a public network CO line call.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
COLR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the PS on the caller’s telephone display when answering a call.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Option 1
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 611
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Ring Pattern Table
Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the PS.
Default
1
Value Range
1–8
612 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Feature Manual References
15.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Programmed Mailbox No.
Specifies the mailbox number of the PS’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Transfer Recall Destination
Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer without
Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 613
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.10 Call Transfer
ARS Itemized Code
Specifies the itemized billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying the calls made from the PS for accounting and billing purposes.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
19.1.1 Verification Code Entry
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Option 2
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
614 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions.
Default
BSS
Value Range
Off: No notification
BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 615
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Automatic C. Waiting
Specifies whether to receive call waiting notification for a call from CO line, a doorphone call or a call via an incoming call distribution group.
Default
On
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES
Pickup Dial Set
automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
Feature Manual References
8.1.6 Hot Line
Pickup Dial No.
Specifies the number to be dialed automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.
Default
Not stored.
616 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
8.1.6 Hot Line
Option 3
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 617
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Call Pickup Deny
Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your PS
Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your PS
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.8 Call Pickup
Executive Override Deny
Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call
Enable: Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
618 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
5.1.3 Executive Busy Override
Absent Message
Specifies the Personal Absent Message which, unlike the System Absent Message, can be customized for each PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.1 Absent Message
Option 4
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 619
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Outgoing Preferred Line
Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call.
Default
ICM/PDN
Value Range
No Line: No line is seized.
Idle: An idle CO line is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups.
ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-12: A CO line programmed for a flexible button (F-1–F-12) is seized. A flexible button customized as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
10.1.3 Line Preference—Outgoing
Incoming Preferred Line
Selects the line on which an incoming call is answered after going off-hook.
Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here, a call ringing at any PDN button on the extension will be answered when going off-hook.
620 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Default
Ringing Line
Value Range
No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call.
Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected.
PDN: The call arriving at any PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-12: The call arriving at a flexible button (F-1–F-12) is selected. A flexible button customized as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
10.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming
Call Waiting Tone Type
Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension.
Default
CW Tone 1
Value Range
CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.12 Call Waiting Tone
LCS Recording Mode
Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the PS’s mailbox when the PS user answers a call that was being monitored.
Default
Stop Record
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 621
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Value Range
Stop Record, Keep Record
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Option 5
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
622 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Display Language
Selects the display language of the PS.
Default
Language1
Value Range
Language1–Language5
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.9 Display Information
Incoming Call Display
Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the PS’s display.
Default
Caller ID Name
Value Range
Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DID Name
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 623
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.9 Display Information
Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a CO line call.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.9 Display Information
Option 6
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
624 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Flexible Button Programming Mode
Specifies whether the PS user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation, or only the One-touch Dialing buttons. When the mode is set to One-touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2" before the number when customizing a One-touch Dialing button.
Default
No Limitation
Value Range
No Limitation, One-touch Dial
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
12.1.4 One-touch Dialing
SVM Lock
Selects whether Simplified Voice Message Log information can be displayed at the extension or other extensions.
Default
Unlock
Value Range
Lock, Unlock
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 625
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Manual References
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Option 7
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
626 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
None
Character Input Mode
Selects the character table to be used for entering characters.
Default
Table 1
Value Range
Table 1: Standard mode
Table 2: Option mode
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Flash Mode during CO Conversation
Selects the function of the FLASH/RECALL button during a CO line conversation.
Default
Flash Recall
Value Range
EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate
5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 627
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Incoming Call Log Memory
Specifies the number of incoming CO line calls that are retained in the PS’s Incoming Call Log memory.
Default
10
Value Range
0–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming
Outgoing Call Log Memory
Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialed by the PS that are retained in the PS’s Outgoing Call Log memory.
Default
5
Value Range
1–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
ISDN Bearer
Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically depending on the type of the PS.
Default
Automatic
628 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Value Range
Automatic, Speech, Audio
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
Option 8
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 629
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call)
Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before a PS will accept another call when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group.
Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "Extension" in 5.15 [3-5-3]
Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.
Default
0 s
Value Range
0–3000 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
630 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List—
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—
Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Option 9
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 631
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
None
PDN Delayed Ringing
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons).
Default
Immediate
Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Built-in Communication Assistant
Specifies whether to enable or disable the Communication Assistant (CA) application for each extension.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Basic Only, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR—Port Number—
Built-in Communication Assistant Server
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 CA (Communication Assistant)
FWD / DND Reference
Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each PS can be referred. FWD and DND settings
can be programmed separately for each PS in 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND.
632 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
FWD Set for Call from CO
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming CO line calls (reference only).
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 633
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
DND Set for Call from CO
Indicates the current DND status for incoming CO line calls (reference only).
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)
FWD Mode for Call from CO
Indicates the forwarding type of incoming CO line calls (reference only).
Default
None
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
634 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD Destination for Call from CO
Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming CO line calls (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD Set for Call from Extension
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
DND Set for Call from Extension
Indicates the current DND status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 635
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)
FWD Mode for Call from Extension
Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Default
None
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD Destination for Call from Extension
Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
636 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD No Answer Time
Indicates the length of time that an incoming call rings at the PS before the call is forwarded (reference only).
Default
15 s
Value Range
0–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 637
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—
CLIP Generate
CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together.
Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten.
If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded.
Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext. Number)
Specifies the extension number of the first location to be programmed.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
PS extension number
Maintenance Console Location
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Location Entry—Number to Generate
Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.
A CLIP number will only be assigned to registered PS extensions, even if the number entered here is larger than the total number of PS extensions.
Default
0
Value Range
1–total number of connected wired extensions
Maintenance Console Location
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
638 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Parameter—Deleting Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of an extension number when using it as part of the
CLIP number.
Default
0
Value Range
0–4
Maintenance Console Location
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Parameter—Head of ID
Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Parameter—Tail of ID
Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 639
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
640 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
For each PS, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and CO line calls. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list.
Call from CO—Present Button Status
Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—External button.
Default
Current status
Value Range
OFF, FWD, DND
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Call from CO—FWD Status Availability
Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming CO line calls.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button, if forward settings have been programmed.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 641
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Call from CO—DND Status Availability
Enables or disables the DND feature for incoming CO line calls.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)
Call from CO—FWD Mode
Specifies the circumstances when incoming CO line calls are forwarded.
Default
None
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Call from CO—FWD Destination
Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming CO line calls.
Default
Not stored.
642 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Call from Extension—Present Button Status
Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—Internal button.
Default
Current status
Value Range
OFF, FWD, DND
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
Call from Extension—FWD Status Availability
Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming intercom calls.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button, if forward settings have been programmed.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 643
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Call from Extension—DND Status Availability
Enables or disables the DND feature for incoming intercom calls.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)
Call from Extension—FWD Mode
Specifies the circumstances when incoming intercom calls are forwarded.
Default
None
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
644 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Call from Extension—FWD Destination
Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD No Answer Time
Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the PS before the call is forwarded.
Default
15 s
Value Range
0–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 645
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Each flexible button can be customized to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 12 flexible buttons can be customized for each PS. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list.
To copy values from one location to another, click the Copy To button.
For more information on flexible buttons, see "6.1.3 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Manual.
Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible button.
Default
Single CO
Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, G-DN, Message Waiting, FWD/DND (Both),
FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External), Group Fwd (Internal),
Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Call Park, Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up, Wrap-up, Time Service, TRS Level
Change, CLIR, COLR, Time Service - Automatic/Manual, Two-way Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice
Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, PDN, SDN
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
Specifies the CO line to be accessed.
Default
1
Value Range
1–128
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
646 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
3.1.16 CO Line Access
Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
Specifies the trunk group to be accessed.
Default
1
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.16 CO Line Access
Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically, or in a specific parking zone.
Default
Automatic
Value Range
Automatic, Specific
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.7 Call Park
Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to are logged in to or logged out from.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 647
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Default
None
Value Range
None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually.
All: All incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
Selects which time modes are switched manually.
Default
All
Value Range
All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
Specifies the TRS level to be used temporarily on a certain PS.
Default
1
Value Range
1–7
648 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS
Feature Manual References
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
4.1.5 Dial Tone Transfer
Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.
Default
1
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for SDN)
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.
The value specified here is only used when
System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD on
4.18 [2-9] System Options is set to "Enable".
Default
Immediate
Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 649
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4—
System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for DSS)
Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for G-DN)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES
650 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Message Waiting)
Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the PS will check its own messages only.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
11.1.3 Message Waiting
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and CO line calls are forwarded.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group Log / Group FWD
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which CO line calls are forwarded.
Default
Not stored.
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 651
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group Log / Group FWD
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are forwarded.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group Log / Group FWD
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
652 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Overflow No Answer
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the PS’s mailbox.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 653
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN)
Specifies the floating extension number of the corresponding (owner) extension for the SDN button.
Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.
Default
Not stored.
654 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Dial (for One-touch)
Specifies the number to be dialed. The PBX can have a maximum of 500 One-touch Dialing buttons for PSs.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
12.1.4 One-touch Dialing
Dial (for NDSS)
Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station
Selection.
specified here.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 655
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode.
Default
1
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.
Default
0
Value Range
0–99
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
656 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
3.1.7 Call Park
Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch
Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 657
6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—
Flexible button data copy
The flexible button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs.
Destination Extension Line
Select the number and name of the PS that will receive the copied settings. Multiple PSs can be selected. To select all PSs at once, click Select All.
When selecting multiple extensions, note that if the source extension has an SDN button, the copy operation cannot be performed.
Maintenance Console Location
6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
None
658 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1)
Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension. This setting is automatically set to ON when the feature is used, and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF, to cancel data transmission.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF, ON
Maintenance Console Location
6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 659
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice
Message
The Simplified Voice Message feature can be provided for each PS.
This screen allows you to specify which extension uses this feature, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for each extension.
For more information on Simplified Voice Message, see "16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)" in the
Feature Manual.
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings— Extension Name
660 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Manual References
None
Simplified Voice Message
Selects which card (IPCMPR or ESVM) to use to store and play back greetings and messages for the extension.
Each extension must be assigned to a specific card and block within the card, and can only use the assigned card/block. If two cards are used in the PBX, you should assign a number of extensions to each card, to ensure that the necessary resources, such as message recording space, are available for each extension.
Default
Card1(A)
Value Range
None, Card1(A), Card1(B), Card2(A), Card2(B)
Maintenance Console Location
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Maximum of SVM Log
Specifies the maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be stored for the extension.
Default
10
Value Range
1–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 661
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
A DSS Console can be used in conjunction with a PT. A maximum of 8 DSS Consoles can be programmed.
DPT Type—Type of the extension port that DSS Console is connected must be set to DSS in 3.21 [1-1]
Slot—Port Property - Extension Port.
Each flexible DSS button can be customized to access a certain feature. A maximum of 66 flexible DSS buttons can be customized for each DSS Console. Select the desired DSS Console from the DSS Console No. list.
To copy DSS Console setting values from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
For more information on flexible buttons, see "6.1.3 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Manual.
Pair Extension
Specifies the extension number of the PT to be used in pair with the DSS Console.
Note that if one or more SDN buttons have been set at the DSS Console, they must be deleted before this setting can be changed.
Default
None
Value Range
None, Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.7 Extension Port Configuration
Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible DSS button.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, G-DN, Message Waiting, FWD/DND (Both),
FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External), Group Fwd (Internal),
Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Call Park, Call Log, Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up, Wrap-up, System
Alarm, Time Service, Answer, Release, TRS Level Change, CLIR, COLR, Headset, Time Service - Automatic/
Manual, Check In, Check Out, Cleaned Up, Two-way Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer,
NDSS, CTI, SDN
Maintenance Console Location
662 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
Specifies the CO line to be accessed.
Default
1
Value Range
1–128
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy
Feature Manual References
3.1.16 CO Line Access
Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
Specifies the trunk group to be accessed.
Default
1
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.16 CO Line Access
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 663
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone.
Default
Automatic
Value Range
Automatic, Specific
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.7 Call Park
Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the paired extension belongs to are logged in to or logged out from.
Default
None
Value Range
None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually.
All: All incoming call distribution groups that the paired extension belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
Selects which time modes are switched manually.
Default
All
664 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Value Range
All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
Specifies the TRS level to be used temporarily on a certain extension.
Default
1
Value Range
1–7
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS
Feature Manual References
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
4.1.5 Dial Tone Transfer
Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.
Default
1
Value Range
1–8
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 665
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for SDN)
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.
Default
Immediate
Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for DSS)
Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
666 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Feature Manual References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for G-DN)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Message Waiting)
Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the paired extension will check its own messages only.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
11.1.3 Message Waiting
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 667
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and CO line calls are forwarded.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group Log / Group FWD
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which CO line calls are forwarded.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group Log / Group FWD
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are forwarded.
Default
Not stored.
668 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group Log / Group FWD
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Call Log)
Specifies the paired extension’s number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which call log information is displayed. If the cell is left empty, the paired extension will display its own call log information.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 669
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Overflow No Answer
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the paired extension’s mailbox.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
670 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Document Version 2008-09 PC Programming Manual 671
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN)
Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to the SDN button.
Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Dial (for One-touch)
Specifies the number to be dialed. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 One-touch Dialing buttons for extensions and DSS Consoles.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
12.1.4 One-touch Dialing
Dial (for NDSS)
Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station
Selection.
specified here.
672 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2008-09
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Feature Manual References
13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station